JP2021132676A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can suppress the decline in interest of a game.SOLUTION: Under control of a first performance state, specific performance execution means can execute a specific performance for displaying a specific performance result, when a game state is controlled to an advantageous state in at least one time of variable display among the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to reservation information stored by reservation storing means. Under control of a second performance state, the specific performance execution means can execute the specific performance for displaying the specific performance result, when a game state is controlled to the advantageous state in at least two times of variable display among the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the reservation information stored by the reservation storing means. A game machine includes suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance suggesting that a specific performance is executed. Under control of the second performance state, the suggestion performance execution means can execute a suggestion performance at a lower rate compared with a case under control of the first performance state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 18-16

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, when a predetermined specific display result is derived by a variable display means that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and derives a display result, a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player. There is a pachinko machine to control. Such a gaming machine is configured to be controllable to a probabilistic state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As such a gaming machine, any one of a plurality of types of super reach effects including the first specific effect and the second specific effect can be executed, and when the first specific effect is executed, the display result of the identification information is displayed. If it becomes a specific display result, the value given will be low, but there is a high possibility that it will be in a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game state, while when the second specific effect is executed, the display result of the identification information will be specified. A gaming machine has been proposed in which the value given is high when the display result is obtained, but the possibility of the probable change state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is low (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-30624

However, the gaming machines described in Patent Document 1 have not been able to suitably perform effects having different properties from each other.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about the variable display that has not yet been executed as hold information, and
It is possible to display the effect result of a specific effect result (for example, a success result) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled and a predetermined effect result (for example, a failure result) for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-11, 18-14, 18-19, 18-20, FIG. 18-20, which can execute a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect). 18-22, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.)
The effect state control means (for example, FIG. 18) that can control the first effect state (for example, the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode) and the second effect state (for example, the state controlled in the battle mode). -6, Fig. 18-7, Fig. 18-9, Fig. 18-10, Fig. 18-14, Fig. 18-21, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-25 to Fig. 18-27, etc.)
With
The specific effect executing means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22, etc.).
The advantageous state in at least two variable displays of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the second effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, etc.).
When controlled to the second effect state, one of the variable display during execution and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. When the variable display controlled and being executed and the variable display stored by the hold storage means are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display different from the one variable display, the effect different from the specific effect. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-, which are special effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18- 27 etc.) and
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14, 18-16) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a super reach suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect is executed. , Fig. 18-19, Fig. 18-20, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-26, etc.)
With more
When the second effect state is controlled, the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a lower rate than when the first effect state is controlled (for example, FIG. 18-). 14, Fig. 18-16, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, other gaming machines according to the present invention may be used.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
After being controlled to the advantageous state, there is a possibility that the first state (for example, the second special figure jackpot X, the post-hit control state of the jackpot A via the small hit, etc.) and the advantageous state rather than the first state are controlled. Can be controlled to the second state (for example, the second special figure big hit Y, the post-hit control state of the big hit B via the small hit, the second special figure big hit Z, the post-hit control state of the big hit C via the small hit, etc.) With state control means (eg, FIGS. 18-2, 18-28, etc.),
A hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about the variable display that has not yet been executed as hold information, and
It is possible to display the effect result of a specific effect result (for example, a success result) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled and a predetermined effect result (for example, a failure result) for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-11, 18-14, 18-19, 18-20, FIG. 18-20, which can execute a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect). 18-22, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.)
The effect state control means (for example, FIG. 18) that can control the first effect state (for example, the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode) and the second effect state (for example, the state controlled in the battle mode). -6, Fig. 18-7, Fig. 18-9, Fig. 18-10, Fig. 18-14, Fig. 18-21, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-25 to Fig. 18-27, etc.)
With
The specific effect executing means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22, etc.).
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the second effect state. When the second state is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, FIG. 18-26 etc.),
When controlled to the second effect state, one of the variable display during execution and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. One of a variable display that is controlled and controlled to the advantageous state and then controlled to the first state and is being executed, and a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. When the variable display different from the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a relief effect) can be executed. Means (eg, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-27, etc.) and
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14, 18-16) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a super reach suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect is executed. , Fig. 18-19, Fig. 18-20, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-26, etc.)
With more
When the second effect state is controlled, the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a lower rate than when the first effect state is controlled (for example, FIG. 18-). 14, Fig. 18-16, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit determination table and the hit type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the screen configuration example. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command at the time of a start winning. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the final production symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the small symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition effect processing. It is a figure which shows the display example when the acquisition effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the setting example of a character panel image. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hold-related data storage part. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the hit notice timing. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition character determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the acquisition character number. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the hit notice character and the loss notice character. It is a figure which shows the control example of the acquisition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the small symbol change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree raising effect processing. It is a figure which shows the display example when the expectation degree raising effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the decision example of the hit notice expectation increase and the loss notice expectation increase. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the expectation degree increase condition. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice effect processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the advance notice effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the display example after the expectation degree raising production is finished. It is a figure which shows the display example after the expectation degree raising production is finished. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st special figure hit determination table which concerns on the feature part 095AK. (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd special figure hit determination table which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the hit type table which concerns on the feature part 095AK. (A) is an explanatory view which shows the 1st special figure jackpot type determination table which concerns on the feature part 095AK. (B) is an explanatory view which shows the 2nd special figure jackpot type determination table which concerns on the feature part 095AK. (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table via a small hit according to the feature unit 095AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern which concerns on a feature part 095AK. FIGS. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of determining a fluctuation pattern related to the feature portion 095AK. Both (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the execution period and execution timing of various effects in a state controlled by the symbol fanning mode according to the feature unit 095AK. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the execution period and execution timing of various effects in the state controlled by the battle mode according to the feature unit 095AK. Both (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the final time reduction variation related to the feature unit 095AK. Both (A) and (B) are diagrams showing a display example when the mode selection effect according to the feature unit 095AK is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end effect processing which concerns on a feature part 095AK. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing which concerns on a feature part 095AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st hold-related data storage part which concerns on the feature part 095AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second hold-related data storage unit related to the feature unit 095AK. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo-variable display determination table which concerns on the feature part 095AK. (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-variable display number determination table related to the feature unit 095AK. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving final variation effect determination processing which concerns on a feature part 095AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving final variation effect determination table which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the super reach suggestion effect determination table which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the time saving final variation effect pattern which concerns on a feature part 095AK. FIGS. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of determining a time-saving final variation effect pattern according to the feature unit 095AK. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the production symbol change which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the production symbol change which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 095AK. It is a figure which shows the hit type table which concerns on the modification of the feature part 095AK.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as coin gaming machines may be used.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame formed in a vertically long square shape, a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and glass formed in a frame shape provided in the game frame so as to be openable and closable. It has a door frame 2.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame, there is an upper plate that forms the ball hitting plate 3. At the bottom of the hit ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball tray 4 for storing a game ball as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 3, and when the game ball as a game medium is launched from the hit ball launcher as a hit ball. A ball striking operation handle 5 to be operated is provided. The ball striking operation handle 5 is also referred to as an operation knob. A game board 6 having a game area 7 on which the driven game ball can flow down is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. A large number of game nails are planted in the game area 7. In the game area 7 of FIG. 1, some of the game nails are shown. The hitting ball launching device is driven by a launching motor, and the force for launching the game ball (launching intensity) is adjusted according to the rotation operation position of the hitting ball operating handle 5. As a result, the player can launch the game ball aiming at a desired place in the game area 7.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. In the game area 7, the first path of the flow path in which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front, and the first of the flow paths in which the game ball flows down. A second route different from the first route is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the left side of the game area 7, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second path is a path in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area 7, and therefore may be called a right-handed path.

The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of the game nails, and the like.

The game ball launched from the ball striking device in response to the operation of the ball striking operation handle 5 and driven into the game area 7 is guided along, for example, an array of game nails when guided to the left game area. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the game ball to the left game area.

The first start winning opening 13 is provided as a structure through which a game ball hit into the left game area of the game area 7 can enter. The first start winning opening 13 is arranged below the effect display device 9. The first start winning opening switch 13a is provided inside the first starting winning opening 13a as a switch for detecting the entered game ball.

A gate 32, a variable winning ball device 15, and a V-determined winning device 87 are provided as a structure in which a game ball hit into the right game area of the game area 7 can enter. The V determination winning device 87 is also referred to as a V winning device. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second starting winning opening 14 in which a game ball can be won. Further, as a switch for detecting the game balls that have entered each of them, a gate switch 32a is inside the gate 32, and a second start winning opening switch 14a is inside the second starting winning opening 14, and a V determination winning device. Inside the 87, a V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharging switch 15b are provided, respectively. Hereinafter, the winning (entering) of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 13 is also referred to as the first starting winning, and the winning (entering) of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14 is also referred to as the second starting winning.

A game ball (starting winning ball) enters (wins) in the first starting winning opening 13 as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) It is a possible winning opening structure. A game ball (starting winning ball) enters (winning) in the second starting winning opening 14 as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) It is a possible winning opening structure.

The gate 32 is a gate structure through which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first starting prize opening 13 of the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the first start winning opening 13, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second starting prize opening 14 and the gate 32 of the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 and the gate 32, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the game ball struck in the right game area may enter the first starting winning opening 13, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is struck in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls will enter them. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the game ball hit in the left game area may enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls hit in the game area will enter them.

The V-determination winning device 87 is a device for determining the V-winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a large hit when a small hit occurs. The small hit is a hit in which the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value addition.

The V-determination winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes through the inside. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width at which a game ball can pass in the front-rear direction, and walls are provided on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A section is provided, and a guide path for guiding the game ball is formed along the passage. At the center of the guideway, when a small hit occurs, over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 times opening period + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second) By repeating opening and closing, an operating port is formed as an opening in which a total of about 10 or more game balls can win a prize within a predetermined period of opening. The passage of the game ball in the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball alternately on both sides of the wall portion, so that when hitting to the right. , A structure (deceleration structure) is formed so that the game ball slowly flows in the passage on the operation port on the upper part of the V-judgment winning device 87.

In the small hit game state, the V-judgment winning device 87 is used for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period elapses. Open control is executed. In the V-judgment winning device 87, the portion of the guide path where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22, and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable portion 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable portion 872 and the fixed portion 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port opens in the guide path, so that the game ball guided to the guide path can fall from the operating port into the V-judgment winning device 87. Become. The operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided separately from the large winning opening of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and also serves as the V large winning opening as the second large winning opening. Further, the V determination winning device 87 is also referred to as a V winning device or a V attacker.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 in which the game ball can enter from the operating port, the V-winning area 870, which is a specific area, is the center of the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 in the left-right direction as a winning area in which the game ball can win. A ramp 871 is provided in the portion and further guides all the game balls that have entered from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 by a tilted path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning section through which the game ball can enter, and the gaming ball entered from the V winning section can be guided downward.

At the uppermost end of the V winning portion, which is the winning portion of the V winning region 870, a plate-shaped opening / closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning region 870 to either an open state or a closed state is provided. ing. The opening / closing member is driven by the solenoid 24, and can move forward and backward to open / close the V winning portion. When the V winning portion is opened due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, in the state where the V winning portion is closed due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 passes over the opening / closing member and opens in the vicinity of the downstream side of the V winning area 870. It is provided in a state where the game ball can be dropped inside the winning ball area where the game ball can be guided downward.

Specifically, the V-winning area 870 of the V-judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and one game ball is in a small hit game state in which the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened. When the player enters the V winning area 870 and wins a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a provided in the V winning area 870. When one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a in the small hit game state, the opening / closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball subsequently guided onto the V winning area 870 is placed in the winning ball area. It will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, in the small hit game state, one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a for the game ball that has entered the inside of the V judgment winning device 87 from the operating port, and the subsequent game ball is detected by the V judgment winning switch 15b. Detected.

In the small hit game state, the V-judgment winning device 87 whose operating port is open closes the operating port when the total number of balls detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a and the V-judgment winning switch 15b reaches 10, and the game is played. The ball is in a state where it cannot enter. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge downward, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is inside the game board 6. It is discharged to a predetermined discharge channel arranged. A V-determination discharge switch capable of detecting the discharged game balls is provided in the discharge passage, and all the game balls discharged by the switch are detected. When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, the game ball wins the V-winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a predetermined validity period. , The condition for generating a big hit is satisfied, and the game is controlled to a big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 gaming balls in total are V-judgment winning without requiring any special operation. The structure and control are designed so that the device 87 can enter the device 87. Further, the structural design is made so that when the game ball enters the V determination winning device 87, the game ball always enters the (100%) V winning area 870. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-handed promotion notification for instructing right-handed is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V determination winning device 87. NS. Therefore, when a small hit occurs, the player should hit right, except when the player does not fire the game ball and when the player hits left during the opening period of the operating opening of the V-judgment winning device 87. For example, the (100%) game ball always enters the V winning area 870 and a big hit occurs.

In this embodiment, an example in which the V-determination winning device 87 is provided with a deceleration structure for a game ball is shown. However, without providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port capable of dropping the game ball is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration in which the operating port is opened 10 times may be used.

A V lamp 875, which is a light emitting body formed of an LED having a character shape of "V", is provided on a part of the front side of the V determination winning device 87. The V lamp 875 emits light basically in white when the game ball wins the V winning area 870 in the small hit game state. The V-lamp 875 can basically emit white light, but the emission color can be changed to blue, red, and rainbow colors depending on the game situation, such as when notifying a hold ream. Is. The V lamp 875 may be provided on the front surface or inside of the V determination winning device 87 as long as it is visible to the player. Further, the V lamp 875 may be provided at a position different from the V determination winning device 87 (for example, a position near the V determination winning device 87).

The variable winning ball device 15 is advantageous for a player who can enter the second starting winning opening 14 (open state) and disadvantageous for a player who cannot enter the second starting winning opening 14. It is a role as a variable winning ball device that changes to a normal state (closed state), equipped with a tulip-shaped open wing piece (a pair of left and right shapes) at the entrance part, and the open wing piece is closed above the open wing piece. A stopper member is provided to limit the entry of the game ball in the state. The open wing piece is driven by the solenoid 16. The variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player by opening the variable winning ball device 15 for a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) when the display result of the normal symbol is hit. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that the game ball struck in the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 15 or the V determination winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the game ball may enter either of the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls hit in the right game area enter them.

On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner as a variable display means for variablely displaying the special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. A device 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variable display of the second special symbol are provided. Both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are included in the special symbol. Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers, characters and other symbols. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). On the display screen of the effect display device 9, various images such as a variable display of the effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each are displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A display area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area (design display area) in which three decorative (also called decorative symbols) production symbols (also called decorative symbols) of "left", "middle", and "right" are variablely displayed. Is formed.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board (game control board) 31. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display according to the variation display, and the second special symbol display 8b is the second. When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, if the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display ( It is sometimes called a variable display unit).

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator. If only one special symbol display is provided, only one starting winning opening may be provided. Further, even if only one special symbol display is provided, two (plural) starting winning openings are provided, and when a game ball wins a prize in any of the starting winning openings, one special symbol display is provided. You may control the variable display. Further, when two (plural) special symbol indicators are provided, one start winning opening is provided, and the two special symbol indicators are variablely displayed in a predetermined order (for example, the two special symbol indicators are variablely displayed for each start winning prize). Control may be performed (such as switching a special symbol display).

Below the game area 7, a jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided. The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is arranged at a position where the right-handed game ball is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area due to the planted state of the game nail.

The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided with a jackpot whose front surface is covered with a rectangular door. When a jackpot occurs, the solenoid 21 tilts the door forward about the bottom to reveal the jackpot. (Opens). Inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 for detecting the entered game ball is provided. A winning route is provided to the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 by a game nail or other structure so that the winning ball can be won in the big winning opening only when the game ball is driven into the right game area. It is restricted. It should be noted that regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening.

When a game ball wins in any of the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and the V-judgment winning device 87, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded accordingly. Is paid out. The prize ball may be paid out even when the game ball passes through the gate 32. Further, at least one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be prevented from being paid out even if the game ball wins.

At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts on the outside of the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

The jackpot is when the jackpot symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, respectively. Occurs in. When a big hit is decided by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening 13, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a. When a big hit is decided by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening 14, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In this way, the fact that the game is in a big hit game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is defined as "big hit by special symbol" or "special symbol jackpot". ".

The big hit also occurs when the game ball that entered when the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is open due to the small hit gaming state enters the V winning area 870. When the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, it is referred to as V winning. When a small hit occurs, a big hit can be generated on condition that a V prize is won. The small hit game state is a game state in which the operating port is opened in the V determination winning device 87 when a small hit occurs. In the small hit game state, the big hit generated based on the V winning of the game ball is referred to as "big hit via small hit" or "big hit via small hit".

The jackpot gaming state is a specific gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value addition. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 may be repeatedly controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game state, the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87, which is the V winning device, is used as the V big winning opening, and the continuous continuous control is performed, and the V big winning opening may repeat the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. .. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the large winning opening of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is open and the state in which the V large winning opening of the V determination winning device 87 is open are called rounds. Repeated continuous control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, when the jackpot of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the jackpot is closed according to the condition for ending the predetermined open state. The condition for ending the open state of the large winning opening is that a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was opened, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls have been generated. Occasionally, it may be an opening end condition set to be satisfied. If the right to continue is generated among the cases where the opening end condition of the big winning opening is satisfied, the big winning opening of the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The right to continue the round in which the big winning opening of the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened is repeatedly generated until the final round (8 rounds or 10 rounds) in which the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit. It is possible.

In the big hit game state, when the V big winning opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened, the V big winning opening is closed according to the condition for ending the predetermined open state. The condition for ending the open state of the V large winning opening as the second large winning opening is when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has passed since the V large winning opening was opened, or a predetermined number (for example, 10). It suffices if the opening end condition is set so as to be satisfied when the winning ball of (pieces) is generated. The opening end condition may be partially or completely different, or part or all may be common, depending on the case of the open state at the large winning opening and the case of the open state at the V large winning opening. .. If the continuation right is generated while the conditions for ending the opening of the V large winning opening are satisfied, the operating opening that becomes the V large winning opening is opened again in the V judgment winning device 87 that is the V winning device. .. The right to continue the round in which the V large winning opening of the V winning device is opened can be repeatedly generated until the final round (5 rounds or 10 rounds) in which the number of times of opening in the big hit game state reaches a predetermined upper limit. be. The number of times the final round is reached may be partially or wholly different, or part or all, depending on whether the large winning opening is open or the V large winning opening is open. May be common.

The variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started based on the condition that the start condition of the variation display is satisfied after the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied. When the fluctuation display time such as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the final stop symbol, the definite special symbol, is derived as the display result. The first start condition is the first execution condition corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and is based on, for example, the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball passes through the first start prize opening 13 as the start prize area. Can be established. The second start condition is a second execution condition corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, and is based on, for example, the occurrence of a second start prize in which the game ball passes through the second start prize opening 14 as the start prize area. Can be established. The start condition of the variation display can be satisfied, for example, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. The passage of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and is a concept including a winning by entering the game ball into the winning opening. Further, the derivation of the display result is a definite display in which the display symbol as the identification information is finally stopped and displayed.

For variable displays such as the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area, the variable display is still started within a predetermined upper limit. Stores information about variable display for which conditions are not met. The storage of information regarding such variable display is called hold storage. The term hold storage is also used to indicate (specify) hold storage information. Hold memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

With respect to the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first hold memory as the hold memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 13. With respect to the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14. When a jackpot occurs in the state where such a first hold memory or a second hold memory exists, the hold memory that existed before the occurrence of the jackpot is maintained as it is, and is displayed in a variable manner after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Used for.

When the second start prize is generated in the second start prize opening 14, even if there is already a hold memory of the first start prize, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second start prize has priority. Is executed. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second display composed of one indicator that displays the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. A special symbol hold storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol holding storage display 18b lights the second special symbol holding storage display 18b every time there is a valid start prize, and every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b is turned on. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b is turned off. Above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a first special symbol hold storage display consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold storage number. A vessel 18a is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of indicators that are lit each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9, such as a 7-segment LED. That is, the ordinary symbol display 10 is configured to display numbers or symbols from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol included in the hit symbol, for example, the symbol "7", the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a closed state, which is disadvantageous to the player, to a predetermined time. It changes to an open state that is advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

A stick controller 122 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The stick controller 122 can be gripped by the player and tilted in a plurality of directions, for example, front-back, left-right, and so on. The stick controller 122 is provided with a trigger button 125, and a trigger sensor 121 is built in the operation rod of the stick controller 122. The trigger button 125 is a predetermined instruction operation by a player holding the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand such as a left hand and pressing and pulling the operation rod with a predetermined operation finger such as an index finger. Is possible. The trigger sensor 121 can detect the movement of the player, such as a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 125. A tilt direction sensor unit 123 is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122, and the vibrator motor 126 is built in the stick controller 122. The tilting direction sensor unit 123 can detect a player's movement such as a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod. The vibrator motor 126 is an eccentric motor for vibrating the stick controller 122.

A push button 120 is provided on a member forming the hit ball supply plate 3 on the upper plate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The push button 120 is arranged at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body, such as above the stick controller 122, and the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The push button 120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 is provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. The push sensor 124 can detect a player's movement such as a pressing operation on the push button 120.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state and the effecting state are controlled so that a variety of games can be enjoyed by launching a gaming ball according to the gaming situation. It suffices for the player to properly use "left-handed" aiming at the left game area and "right-handed" aiming at the right game area as the firing of the game ball according to the gaming situation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The flow of the game after the player starts the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player is seated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first strikes the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is a jackpot (big hit by the special symbol), the game is switched from left-handed to right-handed and aimed at the open jackpot variable winning ball device 20. .. After the jackpot game state is completed, a right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a display such as "Aim to the right" is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. Right-handed promotion notification is also referred to as right-handed notification.

During the jackpot game state, a game is performed in which the jackpot of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 and the V jackpot of the V determination winning device 87, which are in the open state, are aimed by right-handed hitting. During the jackpot game state, a right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state is over, if it becomes a special state, the game will continue to be played by right-handed. After the jackpot game is completed, a special state start notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the special state is started if the special state is reached. In addition, right-handed promotion notification is also performed during the special state. After the special state ends, the right-handed promotion notification executed during the special state ends, so that the game is switched from right-handed to left-handed so that the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13. .. When the special state ends, a left-handed promotion notification may be performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to return to left-handed and play the game. Left-handed promotion notification is also referred to as left-handed notification.

During the special state after the big hit game is completed, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning opening 14 by right-handed. If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14, and the display result is a big hit (a big hit with a special symbol), the game is performed aiming at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 or the V-judgment winning device 87 while hitting right. Further, if the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 and the display result is the small hit symbol which is the small hit display result, the operating opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the small hit game state. The game is played aiming at the V-judgment winning device 87 while hitting right. At the start of the small hit game state, the small hit start notification for notifying that the small hit game state is started is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. Further, when the small hit game state is controlled, for example, the start timing of the small hit display executed before the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened according to the small hit, or the small hit display is executed. Right-handed promotion notification is also performed at a specific timing according to the game situation, such as a predetermined timing before the game is played.

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-judgment winning area 870, and is detected. When a V prize occurs, a big hit via a small hit occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V-winning has occurred. Further, at the end of the small hit game state, a small hit end notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small hit, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 or the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the big hit gaming state, so that the player can hit the right-handed big hit variable winning ball device 20 or the V judgment winning device. Aim at 87 and play a game.

When a game is aimed at the V-judgment winning device 87 in the small hit game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big hit occurs. do not. When the V prize does not occur during the small hit game state in this way, the V prize failure notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V prize has failed. Further, at the end of the small hit game state, a small hit end notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small hit game state, when the special state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 while hitting right. When the special state ends, the game is switched from right-handed to left-handed so that the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13. At the end of the special state, a time reduction end notification for notifying that the time reduction has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to the left-handed play and play the game are performed.

FIG. 2 shows a hit type table. In the hit type table, the hit occurrence condition, the post-hit control state, the number of times of opening, etc. are shown for each hit type. The post-hit control state is a gaming state that can be controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. The number of times of opening is indicated by the number of times of execution of a round that is a big hit game, including the opening time in each round. In the hit type table shown in FIG. 2, the hit types are: 1st special figure big hit A, 1st special figure big hit B, 1st special figure big hit C, 2nd special figure big hit, big hit via small hit X, big hit via small hit. Y, big hit Z via small hit is provided.

The small hit occurs when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning opening 14 provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and the display result of the second special symbol becomes the small hit symbol. Judgment as to whether or not to make the display result of the special symbol a small hit symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small hit determination of the special symbol). When a small hit occurs, a small hit game state is established, and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of times of opening is 10 and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The gaming state controlled after the end of the small hit gaming state is the same as before the small hit unless it is controlled by the big hit gaming state. During the small hit game state, the prize balls are paid out according to the game balls that have entered the inside of the V determination winning device 87. If the display result of the special symbol does not become a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a lost symbol.

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to a small hit, a game ball is won in the operating port, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (V-winning). A big hit occurs via a small hit. The big hit via small hit includes the big hit X via small hit, the big hit Y via small hit, and the big hit Z via small hit according to the control state after hit and the multiple types of big hit gaming states in which one or both of the opening times are different. Is done. The big hit X via the small hit can execute a round in which the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as the V big winning opening in the big hit gaming state, and the number of rounds is 10. The small hit in the big hit X via the small hit is also called the first small hit. The big hit Y via the small hit can execute a round in which the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as the V big winning opening in the big hit gaming state, and the number of rounds is 10. The small hit in the big hit Y via the small hit is also called the second small hit. The jackpot Z via the jackpot can execute a round in which the jackpot of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the jackpot gaming state, and the number of rounds is five. The small hit in the big hit Z via the small hit is also called the third small hit. In the "opening count" of FIG. 2, the case where the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened corresponding to the small hit gaming state is indicated by the "V winning device", and the V-judgment winning device corresponds to the big hit gaming state. The case where the operating port of 87 is opened as the V large winning opening is indicated by the “V large winning opening”.

A big hit that is directly generated by a variable display of a special symbol without going through a small hit is also called a symbol big hit. The symbol jackpot includes the first special symbol jackpot A, the first special symbol jackpot B, and the first special symbol jackpot C according to the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the variation display of the first special symbol. 2 The second special symbol jackpot is included according to the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the variable display of the special symbol.

As big hits, a big hit that is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a big hit via a small hit that is generated by a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. And are included. Each of the big hits via the symbol big hit and the big hit via the small hit is a big hit controlled to a special state after the end of the big hit game state. The advantageous state that is advantageous for the player includes that the big winning opening of the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the big hit gaming state, and that the operating opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as the V big winning opening. It suffices if it is.

The special state is an example of a gaming state that is different from the jackpot gaming state among the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player. In the special state, by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the winning of the second starting winning opening 14 is facilitated (high). High-base control is performed to increase the frequency and approach. The "base" is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the number of shot balls. The positive control that increases this ratio is the "high base control", the state in which the high base control is performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which the high base control is not performed is also called the low base state. The high base control is realized, for example, as a control for increasing the occurrence of a starting prize that triggers the start of fluctuation of a special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the opening frequency and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip), or by lengthening the opening time of one time, the second starting winning opening provided in the variable winning ball device 15 is provided. It can be realized as a control that facilitates winning a prize in 14. The control in which the variable winning ball device 15 is likely to be opened and the game ball is easily passed through the second starting winning opening 14 is also referred to as electric chew support control or electric support. In the high base state, the variable winning ball device 15 that triggers the change of the special symbol is opened more frequently, so that the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 more frequently. Winning a prize in 15 is facilitated (higher entry, higher frequency).

As the high base control and the electric chew support control, some or all of the normal symbol shortening control, the normal symbol probability change control, the opening time extension control, and the opening number increase control are performed. The normal symbol shortening control is a control that shortens the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation display of the display result so that the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage. The normal symbol probability variation control is a control that increases the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a hit symbol. The opening time extension control is a control for prolonging the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 which is usually an electric accessory. The opening number increase control is a control for increasing the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 that triggers a change in the special symbol. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 15 that triggers the fluctuation of the special symbol is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the game ball can easily start and win a prize. Become.

The post-hit control state of the first special symbol jackpot A can be continued until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The post-hit control state of the first special symbol jackpot B can continue in the special state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. The post-hit control state of the first special symbol jackpot C can continue in the special state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed three times. The post-hit control state of the second special symbol jackpot can continue in the special state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The post-hit control state of the big hit X via the small hit can continue the special state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The post-hit control state of the big hit Y via the small hit can continue the special state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. The post-hit control state of the big hit Z via the small hit can continue the special state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. In this way, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed in the special state is set to any of 3, 15, and 100 times according to the hit type. .. If a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the special symbol before the end of the special state, after the big hit game state ends, the special state will be changed until the number of variable display of the special symbol according to the hit type is reached again. It becomes controllable.

In the setting of the hit type shown in FIG. 2, when the hit type is the first special figure jackpot B, the hit type is a special state as the post-hit control state than when the hit type is the first special figure jackpot C. Since the number of variable display times that can be performed increases, a jackpot that is advantageous for the player occurs. When the hit type is the first special figure jackpot A, it is in a special state as the post-hit control state than when the hit type is either the first special figure jackpot B or the first special figure jackpot C. Since the number of variable display times that can be executed increases, a big hit that is advantageous for the player occurs. In this way, the jackpot gaming states that can be controlled by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include the jackpot gaming state that is the first advantageous state, such as the jackpot gaming state in the case of the first special figure jackpot C, and the first special figure jackpot A. , The jackpot gaming state in which the player is more advantageous than the first advantageous state, such as the jackpot gaming state in any case of the first special figure jackpot B, is included.

In the special state, time reduction control may be performed in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the effect symbol, or the like is shortened as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, in the special state, the time saving control may not be performed. In the special state, the high base control and the electric chew support control are performed, but the time saving control is not performed, so that the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the special state is small, for example, three times. However, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and a sufficient period can be secured for the game ball to easily pass through the second starting winning opening 14, and the player can play a game in the second starting winning opening 14 by hitting right. It becomes easier to let the ball pass. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of 1/15. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the possibility of generating a jackpot via a small hit is significantly higher than that of the jackpot by the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol jackpot. With such a setting, the player can pay attention to the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be raised. In the special state, the right-handed hit promotes the launch of the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 14, and it becomes possible to realize a game property different from the normal state.

The first start winning opening 13 is provided so that a winning can be made from the first route. In the normal state of the low base state, the high base control and the electric chew support control are not performed, so that the game ball flowing down the first path is better than the game ball flowing down the second path. It is advantageous for the player in that respect. The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 and the V determination winning device 87 are provided so that they can win from the second path. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening of the big hit variable winning ball device 20 and the operating opening that becomes the V big winning opening of the V judgment winning device 87 are opened, so it is better for the game ball to flow down the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a big hit than the game ball flowing down one route. In the small hit game state, the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more likely to generate a big hit than the game ball flowing down the first path. It is advantageous for the player. In addition, not limited to such comparison of advantages, from other viewpoints, it is advantageous for the player that the game medium flows down the first path in the normal state, and in other game states, the game is played on the second path. A configuration may be adopted in which it is more advantageous for the player to let the medium flow down. For example, other winning openings are provided in the first route and the second route, and in the low base state as a normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning opening than the second route and is high. In other states such as the base state, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state, a configuration may be adopted in which the second route is easier to win the variable winning opening than the first route. The other winning openings may be other variable winning openings, which may be for starting prizes or non-starting prizes.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 built-in. The game control microcomputer 560 also includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the contents of a part or all of the RAM 55 are stored in a predetermined period. The predetermined period in which the contents of the RAM 55 can be stored may be a period from when the power supply is stopped until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power. At least, the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, such as the special symbol process flag, and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, when the game control microcomputer 560 or the CPU 56 executes or processes the control, specifically, the CPU 56 executes the control according to the program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination. The random number for determination is used to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value and the upper limit value are set. The initial value of the numerical data may be, for example, 0. The upper limit of the numerical data may be, for example, 65535. In the random number circuit 503, the numerical data to be read becomes the random number value based on the time when the numerical data is read (extracted) when the start winning prize is generated at a random timing. As described above, the random number circuit 503 has a random number generation function by updating or reading numerical data. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

An input driver circuit 58 and an output circuit 59 are mounted on the main board 31. The input driver circuit 58 is a detection signal from each of the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the V winning switch 87a, the V judgment winning switch 15a, and the V judgment discharging switch 15b. Is given to the game control microcomputer 560. The output circuit 59 includes a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a solenoid 22 that opens and closes the V determination winning device 87 (movable portion 872), and a V winning determination winning. The solenoid 22 that opens and closes the device 87 (moving portion 87 of the area 870) and the solenoid 24 that opens and closes the V winning area 870 (opening / closing member) are driven according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control board 37 controls the payout of balls by controlling the ball payout device 97.

The game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variable display of ordinary symbols, and a first special symbol hold storage display. 18a, the display control of the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b and the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 is performed.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100.

The effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via a relay board 77 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In addition to controlling the variation display of the effect display device 9, the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side and the display control of the V lamp 875 are performed via the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board is performed. Various production controls such as controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 via the 70 are performed.

The effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal from the trigger sensor 121, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, and the push sensor 124 via the I / O port unit 105. The operation detection signal from the trigger sensor 121 is an information signal indicating detection of an operation that is an operation action of the player, such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122. The operation detection signal from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 is an information signal indicating detection of an operation that is an operation action of the player, such as a tilt operation of the stick controller 122 with respect to the operation rod. The operation detection signal from the push sensor 124 is an information signal indicating detection of an operation that is an operation action of the player, such as a pressing action on the push button 120. The effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I / O port unit 105.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Random R and random numbers 1 to 5 are provided as the types of random numbers shown in FIG. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to make a small hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1: Type of hit (type of hit, 1st special figure big hit A to 1st special figure big hit C, big hit via small hit X to big hit Z via small hit) and big hit symbol or small hit Determine the symbol (for determining the hit type, for determining the winning symbol). (3) Random 2: The type (type) of the fluctuation pattern is determined (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3: Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

The jackpot based on the first special symbol includes jackpots in a plurality of hit types such as the first special figure jackpot A to the first special figure jackpot C. The small hit based on the second special symbol includes small hits in a plurality of hit types, such as a large hit via a small hit X to a large hit via a small hit Z. Based on the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, when a decision is made to make a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, or a decision is made to make a big hit or a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol. At that time, the hit type is determined to be one of the types based on the value of random 1 which is a random number for determining the hit type. In the case of a big hit via a small hit, the determined big hit is invalid unless a V prize is generated. When the hit type is determined, a definite special symbol to be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is determined based on the value of random 1 which is a random number for determining the hit type. As for the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation pattern type is determined by using random 2 which is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and any one of the determined fluctuation pattern types is used by using random 3 which is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern is determined by such a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The fluctuation patterns are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, and a reach fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type with reach. When the display result is out of alignment, the variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type differs between the special state and the non-special state, so that the variation pattern type is in the special state. , It is possible to select a fluctuation pattern different from that in the non-special state.

The fluctuation pattern type includes a fluctuation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs and a fluctuation pattern type that cannot be selected when a small hit occurs. For example, a variation pattern type in which an effect related to the small hit is executed and a variation pattern type in which an effect not related to the small hit is executed may be prepared in advance. The variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs may include a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed. When a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding such a small hit is executed is executed, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player. The variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs may be selectable both when a small hit occurs and when a small hit does not occur. The variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit is made may be selectable both when the small hit is made and when the big hit is made. As a result, even if the fluctuation pattern type can be selected when a small hit occurs, the small hit may not occur. Therefore, the player is aware in advance that the small hit will be obtained from the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed. It can be prevented from being stolen. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern types that cannot be selected when a small hit is, for example, a fluctuation pattern that is not related to the small hit and suggests that the big hit is directly made without going through the small hit. Therefore, by making it unselectable when a small hit occurs, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the effect of the fluctuation pattern and the display result from becoming complicated. The fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is made may be set so that the fluctuation pattern set at a specific fluctuation time is selected based on the correspondence with the opening control of the V determination winning device 87. If the fluctuation pattern in which such a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed can be executed when the small hit occurs, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the small hit at the time of displaying the fluctuation. can. Further, the player can easily cope with the game peculiar to the small hit game state that the game ball needs to enter the V determination winning device 87 within a predetermined period in order to obtain a big hit. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to escape the advantageous state of allowing the game ball to enter the V determination winning device 87.

The fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a small hit occurs does not have to execute a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit. The fluctuation pattern may be provided separately depending on whether it is a small hit, a miss, or a big hit. The fluctuation pattern is not divided into the fluctuation pattern when it becomes a small hit, when it becomes a miss, and when it becomes a big hit, and when any fluctuation display result is obtained, the range of the type of fluctuation pattern to be selected May be the same. Rather than setting the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern separately and determining the fluctuation pattern by a two-step lottery process, the fluctuation pattern is not set and only the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to fluctuate in one stage. The pattern may be determined.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit judgment table, a second special figure hit judgment table, a first special figure big hit type judgment table, a second special figure big hit type judgment table, and a small hit via big hit judgment table. Is. These tables are stored in the ROM 54. The first special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 5A is a data table for making a big hit determination for the first special symbol. The second special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 5B is a data table for making a big hit determination and a small hit determination for the second special symbol. The first special figure big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5C is a data table for determining the hit type when it is determined to be a big hit by the first special symbol. The second special figure big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (D) is a data table for determining the hit type when it is determined to be a big hit by the second special symbol. The big hit type determination table via small hit shown in FIG. 5 (E) is a data table for determining the hit type when it is determined to be a small hit by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure hit determination table, a jackpot determination value to be compared with the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, may be set. The jackpot probability by setting the jackpot determination value in the first special symbol hit determination table indicates the ratio of jackpots in the variation display of the first special symbol. In the second special figure hit determination table, a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, may be set. The jackpot probability by setting the jackpot determination value in the second special symbol hit determination table indicates the ratio of jackpots in the variation display of the second special symbol. The small hit probability by setting the small hit judgment value in the second special symbol hit determination table indicates the ratio of small hits in the variation display of the second special symbol.

When the CPU 56 detects the first start prize, which is the start prize for the first start prize opening 13, or the second start prize, which is the start prize for the second start prize opening 14, the CPU 56 is a random number at a predetermined timing. A random R count value is extracted from the circuit 503. For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the first special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the first special symbol is hit. To decide. For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the second special symbol is hit as a jackpot. To decide. In this case, if the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is one of the small hit judgments. If it matches the value, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. The decision to make a small hit means a tentative decision to make a big hit via a small hit. In the case of a small hit, since the big hit is not controlled unless a V prize is generated, it is a tentative decision that the big hit can be generated but the big hit is not yet determined.

The decision as to whether or not to make a big hit includes a decision as to whether or not to shift to the big hit game state and a decision as to whether or not to make the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol into a jackpot symbol. , Including. The decision as to whether or not to make a small hit includes a decision as to whether or not to shift to the small hit game state and a decision as to whether or not to make the stop symbol by the variable display of the second special symbol into a small hit symbol. I'm out. The first special symbol is set so as not to be determined to be a small hit, but the first special symbol may be set to be determined to be a small hit with a predetermined probability.

The first special figure big hit type judgment table, the second special figure big hit judgment table, and the big hit judgment table via small hit each have a hit type judgment value to be compared with the value of random 1 which is a random number for hit type judgment. Just do it. The hit type determination value in the first special figure jackpot type determination table may be set corresponding to each of the first special figure jackpot A to the first special figure jackpot C. In the first special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (C), the first special figure jackpot A is determined at a ratio of 5/100, and the first special figure jackpot C is determined at a ratio of 45/100. The hit type determination value is set so that the first special figure jackpot C is determined at a ratio of / 100. The hit type determination value in the second special figure jackpot type determination table may be set corresponding to the second special figure jackpot. In the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (D), the hit type determination value is set so that the second special figure jackpot is determined at a ratio of 100/100. The hit type determination value in the small hit via big hit type determination table may be set corresponding to each of the small hit via big hit X to the small hit via big hit Z. In the small hit via big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (E), the small hit via big hit X is determined at a ratio of 30/100, and the small hit via big hit Y is determined at a ratio of 35/100, which is 35/100. The hit type determination value is set so that the jackpot Z via the small hit is determined by the ratio.

The hit type determination value is also used as a determination value for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol or small hit symbol of the second special symbol. Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 56 determines the hit type corresponding to the hit type determination value in which the value of random 1 matches as the hit type, and randomly as the jackpot symbol or the small hit symbol. A big hit symbol or a small hit symbol that matches the value of 1 is determined. As a result, the hit type and the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol corresponding to the hit type may be determined at the same time.

The game control microcomputer 560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state. Multiple types of effect control commands that can be transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 include, for example, a variation pattern command, a display result specification command, a first symbol variation specification command, a second symbol variation specification command, a symbol confirmation specification command, and a hit start. Designated command, designated command while opening the large winning opening, designated command after opening the large winning opening, winning end designation command, first start winning designation command, second starting winning designation command, normal state designation command, special state designation command, first One of the hold storage number specification command, the second hold storage number specification command, the symbol specification command, the variation type command, the small hit start specification command, the small hit end specification command, the V winning specification command, and the V judgment winning ball detection specification command. It may contain all or part of the command.

The variation pattern command specifies a variation pattern that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. For example, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, it is sufficient that there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. The variation pattern command is also a command for designating the variation start, and the effect control CPU 101 that has received the variation pattern command controls the effect display device 9 to start the effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. The display result specification command specifies a display result including a missed display result, a big hit type, a big hit display result for each small hit type, and a small hit display result. The first symbol variation designation command specifies to start the variation display of the first special symbol. The second symbol variation designation command specifies to start the variation display of the second special symbol. The symbol confirmation designation command specifies that the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is terminated.

The hit start specification command specifies the start of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot. The command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening specifies the display during the opening of the large winning opening or the opening of the V large winning opening in each round. The command to specify after opening the large winning opening specifies the display according to the closing after opening the large winning opening or after opening the V large winning opening in each round. The hit end specification command specifies the end of the big hit game state for each type of big hit. The first start prize designation command specifies that there was a first start prize. The second start prize designation command specifies that there was a second start prize. The normal state specification command specifies that the game state is the normal state, that is, the low base state. The special state specification command specifies that the gaming state is a special state, that is, a high base state. The first hold storage number specification command specifies the first hold storage number. The second hold storage number specification command specifies the second hold storage number. The symbol designation command is a big hit, depending on the judgment result of the big hit judgment, the small hit judgment, and the hit type judgment among the judgment results at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. Specify whether or not it will be a small hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the judgment result of the hit type. The variation type command specifies the determination result of the variation pattern type determination among the determination results at the time of winning the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14.

The small hit start specification command specifies the start of the small hit game state. The small hit end specification command specifies the end of the small hit game state. The V prize designation command specifies that there was a V prize. The V-judgment winning ball detection designation command specifies that the winning ball to the V-judgment winning device 87 has been detected, including both the V winning ball and the winning ball other than the V winning ball.

The RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 is provided with a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer. The first hold storage buffer can store hold information related to the first special symbol. The second hold storage buffer can store hold information related to the second special symbol. In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first hold storage number, such as 4, is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second hold storage number, such as 4, is secured. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are a random number for hit determination as a hardware random number, a random number 1 for determining a hit type as a software random number, and a random number for determining a variation pattern type. A certain random number 2 and a random number 3 for determining a fluctuation pattern can be stored in association with the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number. The data constituting the hold information stored in the first hold storage buffer is also referred to as the first hold storage data. The data constituting the hold information stored in the second hold storage buffer is also referred to as the second hold storage data. In this way, the first hold storage buffer stores hold information based on the first hold storage data, such as a hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. In the second hold storage buffer, hold information based on the second hold storage data such as a random number for hit determination obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13, the CPU 56 extracts a random number value from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and puts them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Execute the process of storing and saving. Based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts a random number value from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and puts them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer. Execute the process of storing and saving. The storage of information regarding such a start winning in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer is also referred to as hold storage.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed. In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, initialization processing at normal time, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern). Random number update processing for initial values (update processing for the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) and the like are executed.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure detection process (S20) is executed to detect whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on). Next, in the switch process (S21), the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V winning switch 87a, and the V determination winning switch are passed through the input driver circuit 58. The detection signals of the V determination discharge switch 15a and the V determination discharge switch 15b are input, and their state determination is performed.

Next, the CPU 56 executes the display control process (S22), and the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second The display control of the special symbol hold storage display 18b and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed. For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute. In addition, the judgment random number update process (S23) is executed, and the count value of each counter for generating each judgment random number such as the normal symbol hit judgment random number and the small hit type judgment random number used for game control is updated. do. The CPU 56 further executes the initial value random number update process (S24) and the display random number update process (S25), and updates the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number. Subsequently, the CPU 56 executes the special symbol process process (S26), and according to the special symbol process flag, the display states of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 The operating ports of the V determination winning device 87 including the large winning opening and the V large winning opening are controlled in a predetermined order. In the special symbol process process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process (S27) is executed, and the display state of the normal symbol display 10 is controlled in a predetermined order according to the normal symbol process flag. In the normal symbol process processing, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated according to the game state. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect control command control process (S28) and sends the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Further, the CPU 56 executes the information output process (S29), and outputs data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example.

Further, the CPU 56 executes the prize ball processing (S30), and sets the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, and the accessory winning switch 25a. Subsequently, the output process (S31) is executed, and the contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port are output to the output port. Then, the CPU 56 executes the special symbol display control process (S32), and sets the special symbol display control data for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag. Set in the output buffer. Further, the CPU 56 executes the normal symbol display control process (S33), and sets the normal symbol display control data for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag. Set in the output buffer. The CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt enable state is set (S34), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. With the above control, the game control process is started at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S311). Then, any of S300 to S310 is processed according to the internal state indicated by the value of the special symbol process flag.

In the start port switch passing process (S311), if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the first hold storage is provided on the condition that the first hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value such as 4, for example. The value of the first reserved storage counter that counts the number of stored data is increased by 1, and numerical data is extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the counter for generating software random numbers. The numerical data extracted at this time may be, for example, numerical data including a hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number. These numerical data are stored and stored in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer. In the start port switch passing process, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the second hold storage data is stored on condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value such as 4, for example. The value of the second reserved storage counter for counting numbers is incremented by 1, and numerical data is extracted from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers. The numerical data extracted at this time may be, for example, numerical data including a hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number. These numerical data are stored and stored in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer.

The special symbol normal processing (S300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit, and a determination of the hit type when the display result is a big hit or a small hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) is a process of determining the variation pattern and controlling the start of timing of the variation time timer. The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The big winning opening pre-opening process (S305) is a process of controlling the opening of the big winning opening in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 when the big hit game state is reached. The large winning opening opening process (S306) performs control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening, and the like. It is a process. If the conditions for closing the big prize opening are satisfied and there are no remaining rounds, the process shifts to the big hit end process. The jackpot end process (S307) is a process of performing control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the jackpot game state.

The small hit opening pre-processing (S308) is a process of controlling the opening of the operating port in the V determination winning device 87 when the small hit gaming state is reached. The small hit opening process (S309) is a process of confirming whether or not the game ball has V-winned in the V-winning area 870 in the V-judgment winning device 87, and transmitting a V-winning designation command when the V-winning is won. , It is a process of performing a process such as a process of transmitting a small hit end specification command when the end timing of the small hit is reached. The small hit end process (S310) is a process for shifting to a big hit game state when a game ball wins a V in the V winning area 870 in the big hit variable winning ball device 20, and is a process of transmitting a big hit start designation command and a big hit. Set the display time, set the jackpot opening mode, set the process flag transition for the jackpot opening pre-processing, etc., while specially without shifting to the jackpot game state when the V prize is not awarded. This is a process for executing a process for shifting to the symbol normal process (S300).

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S1221. When the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in response to the detection of the first start winning prize (S1212). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first hold storage number is 4. If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, random R which is a hit determination random number, random 1 which is a hit type determination random number, random 2 which is a variation pattern type determination random number, and random 3 which is a variation pattern determination random number are extracted. Stored in the storage area. In this case, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect processing (S1215). In the winning effect processing, with respect to the variation based on the detected first start winning, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are determined in advance at the start winning before the variation is executed.

When a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as hold information, and then the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the variable display is displayed. At the timing of starting, the variable display result is set as the jackpot display result for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that starts variable display based on the pending information in the special symbol normal processing (S300). The big hit judgment value, the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value set corresponding to various random numbers are determined for whether or not the variable display result is used as the small hit display result, and the hit type is determined. , Based on the hit type judgment value. Then, in the variation pattern setting process (S301), the variation pattern including the variation pattern type is determined based on the variation pattern type determination value set corresponding to various random number values and the variation pattern determination value.

On the other hand, apart from such a decision, the timing before the variable display based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is started, specifically, the game ball is first started. At the timing when the hold information is stored by winning the start prize in the winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, the hold information storing various data obtained at the time of the start winning is pre-read, and based on the pre-read hold information. Therefore, the jackpot determination value set in advance for determining whether or not to win a jackpot, determining whether or not to win a small hit, determining the type of jackpot, and determining the type of fluctuation pattern, corresponding to various random numbers. , The prize-winning effect processing for pre-reading determination based on the small hit determination value, the hit type determination value, and the fluctuation pattern type determination value is executed. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 predicts the variation display result in advance before the effect symbol variation display is executed, and based on various determination results at the time of starting winning, the effect symbol variation display is performed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that gives a notice of a big hit or a notice of the possibility of a big hit.

The CPU 56 controls to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1216) and a control to transmit a variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing in S1215 (S1216). S1217) and. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218), and also issues the first hold storage number designation command corresponding to the value of the first hold storage number counter to the effect control microcomputer. Control (S1219) for transmitting to the computer 100 is performed. By executing the processes of S126 and S1217, every time the first start winning opening 13 is started and won, regardless of the gaming state such as the high probability state, the low probability state, the high base state, the low base state, and the big hit game state. , Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. When the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs by executing the processes of S1216 to S1219, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first start winning designation command, and the first hold storage number designation command A set of four commands is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state (S1221). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (S1222). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 4. If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is. If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, random R which is a hit determination random number, random 1 which is a hit type determination random number, random 2 which is a variation pattern type determination random number, and random 3 which is a variation pattern determination random number are extracted. Stored in the storage area. After that, the CPU 56 executes the same winning effect processing as in S1215 (S1225).

The CPU 56 controls to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1226) and a control to transmit a variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing in S1225 (S1226). S1227) and. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228), and also sends the second hold storage number designation command corresponding to the value of the second hold storage number counter to the effect control microcomputer. Control (S1229) to transmit to the computer 100 is performed. By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, every time the second start winning opening 14 is started and won, regardless of the gaming state such as the high probability state, the low probability state, the high base state, the low base state, and the big hit game state. , Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. When the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs by executing the processes of S1226 to S1229, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start winning designation command, and the second hold storage number designation command A set of four commands is sent all at once within one timer interrupt. In the start port switch passing process, even if the second hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in S1222, the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state in S1221 and therefore the second start winning prize is designated. The command may be controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data constituting the hold information in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (S51). At this time, if there is no hold storage data in both hold storage buffers, the process (S80) for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the process ends. On the other hand, when there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer (S52). If there is no hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53). The special symbol pointer is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is undergoing the special symbol process process or the second special symbol is undergoing the special symbol process process. If there is hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer (S54). Under the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second hold storage exists in the second hold storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data of the second hold storage can be displayed. It is executed with priority given to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first hold storage.

Next, in the hold storage buffer corresponding to the setting of the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of hold storage = 1 and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). For example, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and the random number of the RAM 55 is read. Store in a buffer. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer is read out and the RAM 55 Store in the random number buffer of. Then, the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted (S56). For example, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the count value of the first hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the first hold storage buffer are shifted. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second hold storage buffer are erased. As a result, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1.

Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction. (S59). For example, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, control is performed to send the first hold storage number designation command. On the other hand, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, control is performed to transmit the second hold storage number designation command. Subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing is a case where the first special symbol is targeted and a case where the second special symbol is targeted by executing the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer. Can be shared by.

Next, the CPU 56 reads the random number R, which is a random number for hit determination, from the random number buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). At this time, the hit determination random number extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passage process or S1224 of the start port switch pass process and stored in the hold storage buffer or the random number buffer is read out, and the big hit determination is performed. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined hit determination value with a hit determination random number, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or a small hit. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process and a small hit determination process. When a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, if it matches any of the jackpot judgment values set by the first special symbol hit determination table, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. Will be done. When a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, if it matches any of the jackpot judgment values set by the second special symbol hit determination table, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. Will be done.

If it is decided to make a big hit in S60, a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit is set (S71). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C) is selected (S73). When the special symbol pointer is not "first", the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (D) is selected corresponding to the case of "second" (S74). After that, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the hit type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of random 1 which is the random number for determining the hit type stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type. (S75).

If none of the jackpot determination values match in S61, the jackpot determination target is the second special symbol by checking whether the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". It is confirmed whether or not it is a variable display of (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating "second", the process proceeds to S82 in response to the variation display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer in S76, the small hit determination process is performed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol (S77). At this time, if the random R, which is the random number for hit determination read out, matches any of the small hit determination values set by the second special symbol hit determination table, it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit. NS.

If it is decided to make a small hit in S77, a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78). Subsequently, the large hit type determination table via small hit in FIG. 5 (E) is selected (S79). After that, the hit type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of random 1 which is the random number for determining the hit type stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the type of the big hit via the small hit (S80). If it is decided not to make a small hit in S77, the process proceeds to S82. The data indicating the jackpot type determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81).

Next, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S82). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any of the small hit symbols selected and determined in S80 according to the hit type is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, any of the jackpot symbols selected and determined in S75 according to the hit type is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) (S83).

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control processing of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and ends the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (S131). For example, when the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. In addition, a symbol determination command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). The symbol confirmation designation command set at this time is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 by the effect control command control process of S28 shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (S133).

When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the time saving flag (S134). The time saving flag is a flag set when the time saving state is controlled to a special state including the time saving state. The time saving flag may be set even when the time saving state is controlled to a special state that does not include the time saving state. Alternatively, when controlled to a special state that does not include the time saving state, a high base flag or the like different from the time saving flag may be set. In this way, instead of the time saving flag, a high base flag indicating whether or not high base control is performed may be used. After that, the setting for transmitting the jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is made (S135). The jackpot start designation command includes, for example, a jackpot start 1 designation command corresponding to a jackpot corresponding to a variable display of the first special symbol, and a jackpot start 2 designation command corresponding to a jackpot corresponding to a variable display of the second special symbol. Just do it. Further, the jackpot start 1 designation command may include a plurality of types of commands in which different values are set depending on which of the first special figure jackpot A to the first special figure jackpot C is the hit type. ..

Following S135, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (S136). The jackpot display time may be, for example, a time for notifying the effect display device 9 that a jackpot has occurred. In the pre-opening of the large winning opening in S305 shown in FIG. 7, the large winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1 for each timer interruption, and when it reaches 0, the large winning opening or the V large winning opening is opened and the round is started. .. Then, the opening mode is set according to the jackpot type (S137). The jackpot type is specified by the data indicating the hit type stored in the RAM 55. For the opening mode of the big winning opening and the V big winning opening in the round of the big hit game state, the opening target winning opening and the opening can be opened by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 according to the big hit type. The number of times, the upper limit time in the opening time, the upper limit value of the winning ball count, the interval time between rounds, etc. can be set in part or all differently for each jackpot type. As described above, as the opening mode in the round of the big hit game state, a plurality of different modes are prepared for each type of big hit with respect to the winning opening to be opened, the number of times of opening, and the like. The data indicating the opening mode of the jackpot is set in a predetermined storage area. For example, the opening count data is set in the opening count counter for counting the opening count. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S138), and the process ends. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the pre-opening processing of the large winning opening.

When the big hit flag is not set in S133, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set, the small hit opening mode is set (S140). At this time, the small hit release control timer used for the small hit release control is set to be the timer initial value. In the small hit opening mode, the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time as the opening interval, and the like can be set by referring to the opening pattern data of the small hit stored in the ROM 54. The data indicating the small hit opening mode is set in a specific storage area. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening preprocessing.

If the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time saving flag is set (S142). If the time saving flag is not set, the process proceeds to S152. When the time reduction flag is set, the total time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (S143). The total time reduction counter is a counting means for counting the total value of the fluctuation display number of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol in the special state including the time reduction state. In the jackpot end processing of FIG. 11, the total time reduction counter is set with an initial count value according to the hit type. Next, based on confirming whether or not the special symbol pointer is the data indicating the "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (S145). When it is the end of the variable display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148. At the end of the variation display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (S146). The special figure 2 time reduction counter is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when it is controlled to a special state including the time reduction state after the jackpot game is completed. In the jackpot end processing of FIG. 11, the initial count value according to the hit type is set in the special figure 2 time reduction counter. After that, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). When the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter becomes "0", the process proceeds to S149 in order to end the special state. If the count value of the special time reduction counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S148, and it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter that has been subtracted and updated in S143 has become "0". If the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S152. When the count value of the total time reduction counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149. In S149, the set time saving flag is reset. Then, the set time reduction counter is reset (S150). In addition, a setting for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is made (S151). When the upper limit of the variation display that can be executed in the special state is set regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special figure is used only by the total time reduction counter. It is not necessary to execute the process related to the 2 hour reduction counter.

If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S152), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer set before the jackpot end process is executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (S162). If it has not passed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed, the counter setting corresponding to the hit type is performed (S163). Here, the count initial value of the total time reduction counter is set according to the post-hit control state for each hit type shown in FIG. For example, when the hit type is any of the first special figure jackpot A, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpot via small hit X, the data indicating "100" is used as the initial count value of the total time reduction counter. Set. Further, when the hit type is any one of the first special figure big hit B, the big hit Y via the small hit, and the big hit Z via the small hit, the data indicating "15" is displayed as the count initial value of the total time reduction counter. Set. When the hit type is the first special figure big hit C, the data indicating "3" is set as the count initial value of the total time reduction counter.

Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a special state designation command corresponding to the hit type to the effect control microcomputer 100 is made (S164). For example, when the hit type is any of the first special figure jackpot A, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpot via small hit X, a special state that can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The first special state specification command is transmitted in response to. Further, when the hit type is any one of the first special figure big hit B, the big hit Y via the small hit, and the big hit Z via the small hit, a special state that can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 15 times. The second special state specification command is transmitted in response to. When the hit type is the first special figure jackpot C, the third special state designation command is transmitted corresponding to the special state that can be continued until the variable display of the special symbol is executed three times. At this time, the time saving flag is set (S165). Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S166), and the process is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening pre-processing (S308) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in the open state based on the small hit opening mode, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command indicating that the small hit game state is started to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S412). Further, the CPU 56 sets a V-determination winning number counter (S413). The V-determination winning number counter is a counting means for counting the number of winnings to the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 in the open state of the small hit. For example, "10" is set as the initial count value of the V-judgment winning number counter, and the initial setting for down-counting the number of winnings to the V-judgment winning device 87 is performed. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening processing (S309) (S413).

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (S309) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit opening processing, the CPU 56 updates the small hit opening control timer by -1 subtraction (S430). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V determination winning number counter is "0" (S431). In the V-judgment winning number counter, "10" is set as the initial count value in the small hit opening preprocessing of FIG. 12, and when 10 winning balls are counted, the counting value becomes "0". When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0", the process proceeds to S441. When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0", it is confirmed whether or not the small hit release control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432). When the small hit release control timer has timed out, the process proceeds to S441. When the small hit release control timer has not timed out, the movable unit 872 is operated in the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 according to the time value of the small hit release control timer based on the small hit release mode. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is performed (S433).

After that, the V winning switch 87a is turned on in order to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 which is open inside the V judgment winning device 87 is detected. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (S434). If it is in the ON state at this time, the V winning flag is set in response to the detection of the V winning (S435). Then, a process for transmitting the V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the detection of the V winning ball. Subsequently, the opening / closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning region 870 of the V winning region 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that has entered the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V, the V-winning area 870 is closed, and then the game ball that has entered the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87 , All are guided to the winning ball region and detected by the V determination winning switch 15b.

When it is not in the ON state in S434, it means that V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15b is in the ON state (S438). At this time, if it is not in the ON state, the process is terminated, and if it is in the ON state, a down count is performed to "-1" the count value of the V determination winning number counter (S439). In addition, a process for transmitting a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is performed (S440). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the detection of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, and also recognize the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87. Becomes possible.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0", the small hit opening end condition is satisfied because the number of winnings to the V-judgment winning device 87 reaches the upper limit value in the small hit gaming state. It's time. Further, when the small hit release control timer times out, it means that the small hit release end condition is satisfied because the small hit release control is completed. At these times, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in the closed state, and closes the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 (SS441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is being opened according to the opening mode of the small hit, the counting value of the V-judgment winning number counter is increased. The V-judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit release control timer times out, the V determination winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit release control in the small hit opening mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period, which is the V-winning valid period after the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed, is set in the V-winning valid period timer (SS442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (small hit end processing). The value corresponding to S310) is updated (SS443), and the process ends. As a result, the time counting of the specific period, which is the valid period of the V prize after the V determination prize device 87 is closed, is started. Since the specific period, which is the valid period of the V prize, is set in this way, the game ball can be detected even when the game ball passes through the V prize area 870 later than the normal passage time. Can be done. Further, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally tries to win a prize in the V winning area, only that period is detected, so that fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning validity period timer by -1 subtraction (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442). When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag has already been set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is used to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. Determines whether or not is in the ON state (S444). If it is not turned on here, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state, it means that the V prize is detected during the V prize valid period, and the V prize flag indicating that the V prize is detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting the V prize designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V prize has been generated.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has been completed. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, the opening / closing member is opened to control the V winning region 870 to return to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448).

If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, and the jackpot flag is set (S449). In addition, data indicating the hit type of the jackpot via the small hit is stored in the jackpot type buffer (S450). The data indicating the hit type of the big hit via the small hit may be stored in the big hit temporary type buffer by S81 in the special symbol normal processing of FIG. In S450, data indicating the hit type of the jackpot via the small hit is officially stored in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it is decided that the jackpot will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. At this time, the time saving flag is reset (S451). Subsequently, a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted (S452). The jackpot start designation command may include, for example, a jackpot start 3 designation command corresponding to a jackpot via a small hit. The jackpot start 3 designation command may include a plurality of types of commands in which different values are set depending on which of the jackpot via jackpot X to the jackpot via jackpot Z is the hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts by the jackpot start designation command. In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (S453). In addition, the opening mode is set according to the jackpot type (S454). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot game state does not occur, so the stored data of the jackpot type is deleted (S456), and the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol normal processing (S300). The value is updated to the value (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

The effect control process includes a command analysis process (S704), an effect control process process (S705), a random number update process (S706), and a hold storage display control process (S707). In the command analysis process, the received effect control command is analyzed, and the flag corresponding to the received effect control command is set. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the command data is stored in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103. Further, when the display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103. In addition, when various effect control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command has been received is set.

In the effect control process process, the effect control for performing various effects such as the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the effect display device 9 or the like is executed according to the content of the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. In the effect control process process, the effect control process flag is updated according to the current control state, and the process corresponding to the effect control process flag is selected from each process according to the control state. In the random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers, such as a random number for selecting and determining various effects, is updated. In the hold storage display control process, control is performed to update the hold display image displayed on the effect display device 9 when a predetermined display update condition is satisfied.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 executes any of S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag after executing the ball striking promotion effect process (S500) and the look-ahead process (S501). conduct. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed. Both the control related to the effect synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the control related to the effect synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed in one common effect control process process. In the effect control process process, control related to the effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is also executed in a manner that can be displayed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol.

In the ball striking promotion effect processing (S500), the game state is confirmed based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560. The hitting promotion effect is executed according to the game state confirmed at this time. The hitting ball promotion effect is an effect of promoting the hitting of the game ball into at least one of the first path (left-handed path) and the second path (right-handed path) in the game area 7. For example, the hitting ball promotion effect includes a right-handed promotion notification effect that notifies the player to promote the driving of the game ball into the second path (right-handed path). The hitting promotion effect may include the right-handed promotion notification effect and the left-handed promotion notification effect that notifies the player to promote the hitting of the game ball into the first path (left-handed path). In the effect of the right-handed promotion notification, for example, in a specific display area of the effect display device, a character image such as "right-handed" that suggests and promotes right-handed is continuously displayed together with a right-pointing arrow image. It is done by doing. As a hitting promotion effect, based on the state in which the right-handed promotion notification is executed, the driving of the game ball (right-handed) into the second path (right-handed path) is promoted, and after the right-handed promotion notification is completed. By executing the left-handed promotion notification in a predetermined period, the driving of the game ball (left-handed) into the first path (left-handed path) may be promoted. Then, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the left-handed promotion notification may be terminated.

In the look-ahead processing (S501), the hold display information corresponding to the hold information possessed by the game control microcomputer 560 is stored, and the hold display information can be used for the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect pre-reads the hold display information and determines the content of the change display of the special symbol based on the corresponding hold information before the turn of the change display of the special symbol based on a certain hold information arrives. It will be possible to suggest what the variable display of special symbols will be in the future by prior notice. The hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is also referred to as the hold information of the target. In addition, the variation display of the special symbol based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is also referred to as target variation.

In the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800), it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. For example, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. In the effect symbol variation start process (S801), control is performed so that the effect at the time of variation, which is an effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, is started. Corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command, the effect pattern of the effect at the time of fluctuation is selected, and the time of the effect time timer for measuring the effect time to be executed is started. In the effect symbol changing process (S802), the switching timing of each state constituting the effect pattern is controlled, and whether or not the effect time timed by the effect time timer has expired is monitored. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S803), based on the fact that the effect time has ended or the symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect at the time of change is terminated, and the confirmation special symbol which is the variation display result of the special symbol is displayed. Controls to display the corresponding effect result.

In the jackpot display process (S804), display control such as control for performing a fanfare effect when a jackpot occurs is performed. The fanfare effect when a big hit occurs includes a big hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. In the process during the round (S805), the display is controlled during the round of big hits. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S807). In the round post-processing (S806), display control is performed between rounds of big hits. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (S805). In the jackpot end effect processing (S807), the effect display device 9 performs display control to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

In the small hit display process (S808), display control such as control for performing a fanfare effect for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) when a small hit occurs is performed. The fanfare effect when a small hit occurs includes a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a small hit. In the small hit opening process (S809), various effect controls are performed during the opening of the V determination winning device 87 in the small hit. In the small hit end effect process (S810), the effect display device 9 performs effect control to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. Further, in the small hit game state, when the V winning switch 87a detects the V winning of the game ball and it is determined that the V winning has occurred, the V winning effect control for notifying that the V winning has occurred is performed. When a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) in order to shift to the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) because the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled by each of the above processes, the effect at the time of variation corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the effect result corresponding to the variation display result of the special symbol is obtained. Is displayed. The effect control CPU 101 recognizes, for example, the specified variation pattern and the display result for the variation display executed based on the received variation pattern command and the display result specification command, and produces the effect at the time of variation. Determine the result. Further, in the effect control process process, the ball striking promotion effect process of S500 confirms the execution status of the effect control process, and the ball striking promotion effect is executed according to the game control state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of ball striking promotion effects including a high base state right-handed promotion notification, a small hit right-handed promotion notification, and a large hit right-handed promotion notification can be executed as the ball striking promotion effect. The high-base state right-handed promotion notification is a ball-striking promotion effect for making a right-handed hit to aim the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 14 of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 in the high-base state. The small hit right-handed promotion notification is a ball-striking promotion effect for making a right-handed hit and aiming for the game ball to enter the V-determined winning device 87 in the small-hit game state. The jackpot right-handed promotion notification is for hitting a ball to aim for the entry of a game ball into the jackpot of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 or the V jackpot of the V-judgment winning device 87 by hitting right in the jackpot game state. It is a production.

High-base state right-handed promotion notification, small hit right-handed promotion notification, and big hit right-handed promotion notification suggest and promote right-handed hitting such as "right-handed" together with a right-pointing arrow image. It may be executed using the same image that is continuously displayed. In other words, even if the right-handed promotion notification corresponds to the type of promotion notification in the high base state, the promotion notification in the small hit, or the promotion notification in the big hit, it is displayed in a state in which it cannot be specified. good. The right-handed promotion notification is an image that continuously displays a character image such as "right-handed" that suggests and promotes right-handedness together with a right-pointing arrow image. The small hit right-handed promotion notification is displayed as a yellow image, and the big hit right-handed promotion notification is displayed as a red image. May be good. The size of the image used for the effect may be different depending on the type of the ball striking promotion effect. For example, the size of the image used for the production may be different depending on the advantage for the player. As an example, small hit right-handed promotion notifications are promoted using a small image, high-base state right-handed promotion notifications are promoted using a medium-sized image, and large hit right-handed promotion notifications are large. The promotion notification may be performed using the image of. As for the high-base state right-handed promotion notification, the promotion notification may be performed using a large image in the same manner as the big hit right-handed promotion notification.

As the pachinko gaming machine 1, an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium is enclosed and game points (scores) are added according to the occurrence of a prize without paying out the gaming medium to the player's hand may be adopted. The enclosed gaming machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of gaming balls, which is an example of a gaming medium, in the gaming machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. Game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the game ball, and game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize. The game machine that pays the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of a prize has been explained, but the game medium is enclosed and the game point (the game point without paying the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of a prize) An enclosed gaming machine that adds points) may be adopted. The enclosed gaming machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of gaming balls, which is an example of a gaming medium, in the gaming machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. Game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the game ball, and game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

The comparative expressions of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") may include that one of them is the ratio of "0%". For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%". For example, among the values in the range of 0% to 100%, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

As a means for detecting the movement of the player, an infrared sensor, a motion sensor, or other detection means capable of directly detecting the movement of the player may be used.

FIG. 17-1 shows a configuration example AKP0 of the screen display in the effect display device 9. In the configuration example AKP0, the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, the small symbol display area 9K, and the right-handed display area 9Z are provided on the screen of the effect display device 9. The effect symbol display area 9L is a “left” symbol display area provided for variably displaying the effect symbol that is the left symbol. The effect symbol display area 9C is a “middle” symbol display area provided for variably displaying the effect symbol that is the middle symbol. The effect symbol display area 9R is a “right” symbol display area provided for variably displaying the effect symbol that is the right symbol.

A small symbol display area 9K is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the effect display device 9. The small symbol display area 9K is smaller than the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the upper right side on the screen of the effect display device 9. In the small symbol display area 9K, the variable display of the small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol. The effect image showing the small symbol is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the effect symbol, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the effect symbol is common. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing the effect symbol includes a part indicating a number and a part indicating a character, the effect image showing the small symbol has the same symbol number as the part indicating the number included in the effect picture. Since it is an image showing the corresponding numbers and does not include a part showing the character, it suffices if the small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than the identification information image showing the effect symbol. In the small symbol display area 9K provided on the screen of the effect display device 9, the small symbol as the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the confirmed small symbol as the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

In response to the variable display of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol and the small symbol is executed. After that, when the final stop symbol is derived as the variable display result of the special symbol, the final stop symbol is derived as the variable display result of the effect symbol, and the final stop symbol is derived as the variable display result of the small symbol. A definite small symbol is derived. In this way, deriving various display symbols such as special symbols, effect symbols, and small symbols means that the display symbols as identification information are stopped and displayed by a complete stop or a final stop to end the variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the derivation of the final effect symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol becomes "0" and the effect symbol is displayed. It may be stopped and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state of the effect symbol is also called a stop display due to a temporary stop of the effect symbol, and although the display result in the variable display of the effect symbol is not definitively displayed, the effect symbol fluctuates due to the scroll display or the update display. The player can recognize that it is not progressing. It should be noted that the stop display due to the temporary stop of the effect symbol does not cause slight shaking or expansion / contraction, and the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed by a complete stop for a period shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). May be included. As for the small symbol, it is sufficient if the stop display by temporary stop similar to the effect symbol is possible.

FIG. 17-2 shows a configuration example of an effect control command used as a start opening winning command. In the start port switch passing process (S311) in the special symbol process process, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command, and the first hold storage number designation are used as the start opening prize command. Settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to the occurrence of a start winning prize, such as a command or a second hold storage number command, are made. FIG. 17-2 (A) shows a setting example regarding these start opening winning commands. FIG. 17-2 (B) shows a setting example of a symbol designation command included in the start opening winning command.

The command A401H, which is the first start prize designation command, and the command A402H, which is the second start prize designation command, are included in the start prize designation command that specifies the occurrence of the start prize. The subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The command C0XXXH, which is the first hold storage number designation command, and the command C1XXH, which is the second hold storage number designation command, are included in the hold storage number designation command for designating the hold storage number. It should be noted that XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the hold storage number designation command, different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 04H) is set according to the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. The symbol designation command is a command C2XXXH in which different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 06H) is set according to a display result, a pre-reading determination result regarding a hit type, and the like. The variation type command is a command C3XXXH in which different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern type, the result of the look-ahead determination regarding the variation pattern, and the like.

Of the symbol designation commands, the commands C201H and C202H can be transmitted when the value of the random number R, which is a random number for hit determination, matches the jackpot determination value, and it is determined that a jackpot will occur due to the variation display of the special symbol. By doing so, the winning judgment result that the jackpot game state is controlled is notified. Of the symbol specification commands, commands C203H to C205H can be transmitted when the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, matches the small hit determination value, and it is determined that a small hit will occur due to the variation display of the special symbol. The result of the winning determination that the game is controlled to the small hit game state is notified. Further, the commands C203H to C205H identifiable which of the small hit via big hit X and the small hit via big hit Z is notified according to the value of random 1 which is a random number for determining the hit type. Of the symbol specification commands, command C206H can be transmitted when the value of random R, which is a random number for hit judgment, does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value. When it is determined that a small hit does not occur, the winning judgment result that the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not controlled is notified. In this way, the symbol specification command uses random R, which is a random number for hit determination, and random number 1, which is a random number for determining the hit type, which is read at the time of starting winning, and the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small". It is transmitted as judgment result information for notifying the judgment result at the time of winning, such as whether or not it is determined as "hit" and the hit type when the variable display result of the special symbol is determined as "small hit". When the variable display result of the special symbol is not determined as "big hit" or "small hit", it is also said that the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing". When the variable display result of the special symbol is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit", it is also said that the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit".

FIG. 17-3 shows a configuration example of the fluctuation pattern. The plurality of fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 17-3 differ in the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display mode of the effect symbol. The special symbol fluctuation time is the time required from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the derivation of the confirmed special symbol as the variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol. The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result of the special symbol corresponds to either "miss" or "hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "hit" may be any one corresponding to both the special symbol big hit and the big hit via the small hit. The fluctuation patterns corresponding to "hits" are fluctuation patterns that correspond only to special symbol jackpots and do not correspond to jackpots via small hits, fluctuation patterns that correspond only to jackpots via small hits and do not correspond to special symbol jackpots, and special symbols. It may include a part or all of the fluctuation patterns corresponding to both the big hit and the big hit via the small hit.

FIG. 17-4 shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern according to the gaming state and the like. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are cases where the normal state, the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 3 or more, the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 1 or 2, and the fluctuations in the special state. The setting of the determinable pattern is different between the case of the final variation in which the remaining number of displays is 0 and the case of the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the special state. The remaining number of variable displays in the special state is the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the special state. The fluctuation pattern is determined when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, and the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state can be specified as the number of fluctuation display times remaining after the start of the current fluctuation display. Just do it. For example, in the decidable pattern corresponding to the final fluctuation, which is the final fluctuation display in the special state, the number of fluctuation display times remaining after the start of the current fluctuation display becomes 0, so that the fluctuation in the special state A decidable pattern is set when the number of remaining display times is 0. The variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the special state has finished the special state when each variable display is executed, and the gaming state is in the normal state. However, with respect to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the special state, unlike the fluctuation display in other normal states, a special fluctuation pattern can be determined. Therefore, the setting of the decidable pattern is different between the case of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the special state and the case of the variable display in another normal state. In the determination example shown in FIG. 17-4, when the variable display result is "hit", the hit type is either the first special figure big hit A to the first special figure big hit C or the second special figure big hit. The case where the display result of the special symbol is "big hit" and the case where the display result of the special symbol whose hit type is any one of the big hit X via the small hit to the big hit Z via the small hit is "small hit" are included. There is.

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (A), in the determination example AKE01 in the normal state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 ~ PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-4 are included in the decidable pattern. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" in the normal state where high base control or electric chew support control is not performed, it is also called normal loss. In the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is not the reach mode, and as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol, the final effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. It is included in the fluctuation pattern. The display result when the non-reach combination is a definite effect symbol is also called non-reach loss. The variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 and PB2-1 to PB2-4 have a predetermined reach that is not a hit combination as a result of displaying the variable display of the effect symbol after the variable display mode of the effect symbol is changed to the reach mode. The final effect symbol of the combination is included in the reach fluctuation pattern that is stopped and displayed. The display result when the reach combination is a definite effect symbol is also called reach loss. The reach combination is also referred to as a reach loss combination. The reach mode is a mode in which the variable display is continued for the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the variable display form a part of the jackpot combination. .. For example, in the reach mode, the same effect symbol is stopped and displayed as the left symbol and the right symbol. It is also said that reach is established when the reach mode is set in the variable display of the effect symbol. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. The non-reach combination and the reach combination are also collectively referred to as a loss combination.

In the variable display of the effect picture by the variation pattern PA1-4, one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays by temporarily stopping the effect symbol during the variable display and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production shown in is executed. The variable display that is resumed after the effect symbol is temporarily stopped is also called pseudo-continuous variation. In the variable display of the effect drawing by the variation pattern PA1-4, the final effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. Even in the variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PA2-2 and the variation pattern PB2-2, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed once. In the variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PA2-3 and the variation pattern PB2-3, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed twice. In the variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PB2-4, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed three times. In the variable display of the effect symbol by any of the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, and PB2-2 to PB2-4, after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once or multiple times, the effect symbol is displayed. The variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and finally, the final effect symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed.

In the determination example AKE01, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and PB3-1 to PB3-4 are included in the determinable patterns. In the variable patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and PB3-1 to PB3-4, after the variable display mode of the effect symbol is changed to the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol, the winning combination of the variable display is confirmed. Is included in the hit fluctuation pattern that is displayed as stopped. The hit fluctuation pattern can be used as a big hit fluctuation pattern when the display result of the special symbol is "big hit" or as a small hit fluctuation pattern when the display result of the special symbol is "small hit". The definite effect symbol of the winning combination is an aspect of the display result in which the same effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. In the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, for example, the effect symbols showing the numbers 1 to 9 are variably displayed as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively. Further, the effect symbol indicating the number 7 includes an effect symbol whose display color is red and indicates the number 7 and an effect symbol whose display color is gold and indicates the number 7. The effect symbol whose display color is red and shows the number 7 is also referred to as the effect symbol of red 7. The effect symbol whose display color is gold and shows the number 7 is also referred to as the effect symbol of gold 7.

As the final effect symbol of the hit combination, for example, different effect symbols may be determined depending on the hit type. As an example, when the hit type is any of the first special figure big hit A, the second special figure big hit, and the big hit X via the small hit, the effect symbol of gold 7 can be determined as the final effect symbol of the hit combination. .. Further, when the hit type is any one of the first special figure big hit B, the big hit Y via the small hit, and the big hit Z via the small hit, the effect symbol of red 7 can be determined as the final effect symbol of the hit combination. When the hit type is the first special figure jackpot C, any of the effect symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 can be determined as the final effect symbol of the hit combination. In addition, even if a definite effect symbol of a hit combination using any of the effect symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 is derived as a display result in the variable display of the effect symbol, it is promoted thereafter. By executing the effect, it may be notified that it is another hit type.

When the hit type is any of the first special figure big hit A, the second special figure big hit, and the big hit X via the small hit, it is a special after-hit control state until the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. It becomes possible to control the state. When the hit type is any of the first special figure big hit B, the big hit Y via the small hit, and the big hit Z via the small hit, the special symbol is set as the post-hit control state until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 15 times. It becomes possible to control the state. When the hit type is the first special figure big hit C, it is possible to control the special state as the post-hit control state until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches three times. In this way, as a display result in the variable display of the effect symbol, the red 7 is more than the case where the final effect symbol of the hit combination using any of the effect symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 is derived. Determining the winning combination using the effect symbol When the effect symbol is derived, a big hit that is advantageous for the player can be generated in terms of the post-hit control state and the like. As a display result in the variable display of the effect symbol, when a definite effect symbol of a hit combination using any of the effect symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 is derived, or when the effect symbol of red 7 is used. A big hit that is more advantageous for the player in terms of the post-hit control state, etc., when the final production symbol of the hit combination using the production symbol of gold 7 is derived than when the final production symbol of the hit combination is derived. Can occur.

The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the effect symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of reach effects are executed in which the ratio of the variable display results to "hits" differs depending on the effect mode. The rate at which the variable display result is "hit" is also called the hit reliability or the hit expectation. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher expectation than the normal reach. As for the fluctuation pattern in the determination example AKE01, when the variable display result is "missing", the fluctuation pattern to be used is determined at a ratio according to the number of reserved memories and the hit expectation, and the variable display result is "hit". In a certain case, a fluctuation pattern to be a usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the hit expectation. For example, when the number of reserved storages is large, a non-reach fluctuation pattern having a shorter special figure fluctuation time at a higher rate than when the number of reserved storages is small may be determined as the usage pattern. When the variable display result is "hit", a fluctuation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is larger than that when the variable display result is "loss" may be determined as the usage pattern. When the variable display result is "hit", the variation pattern may be determined to execute the reach effect of the super reach at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "miss".

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (B), in the determination example AKE02 when the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 3 or more, if the variable display result of the special symbol is “missing”, the fluctuation pattern PB1- 1 to PB1-3, PA2-1 to PA2-3, and PB2-1 to PB2-4 are included in the determinable pattern. Fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-3 are included in the non-reach variation patterns. When the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 3 or more, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern with a shorter special figure fluctuation time as the usage pattern at a higher rate than in the normal state. It suffices if the time reduction control that shortens the time can be performed. In the case of a special state, for example, the first special period such as the period in which the remaining number of times of the variable display is 3 or more and the second special period such as the period in which the remaining number of times of the variable display is less than 3 are the special symbols. The presence or absence of the time reduction control that shortens the variable display time may be different. In this case, the presence / absence of the time saving control is set so that the time saving control is performed in the first special period in the special state and the time saving control is not performed in the second special period in the special state. When the variable display result is "missing" in a special state where time saving control is performed together with high base control and electric chew support control, it is also called time saving medium loss. In the decidable example AKE02, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and PB3-1 to PB3-4 are included in the decidable pattern as in the decidable example AKE01. It has been. As for the fluctuation pattern in the determination example AKE02, when the variable display result is "miss", the fluctuation pattern to be used is determined at a ratio according to the number of reserved memories and the hit expectation, and the variable display result is "hit". In a certain case, a fluctuation pattern to be a usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the hit expectation.

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (C), in the determination example AKE03 when the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 1 or 2, if the variable display result of the special symbol is “missing”, the fluctuation pattern PC1 -1, PC1-2 are included in the decidable pattern. In the variable display of the effect symbols by the variation pattern PC1-1 and the variation pattern PC1-2, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. The variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PC1-1 and the variation pattern PC1-2 may or may not be in the reach mode. In the determination example AKE03, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variation patterns PC3-1 and PC3-2 are included in the determinable patterns. In the variable display of the effect symbols by the variable patterns PC3-1 and PC3-2, after the variable display and the reach effect which are partly common to the variable display of the effect symbols by the variable patterns PC1-1 and PC1-2 are executed, the hit The finalized effect symbol of the combination may be stopped and displayed. As the fluctuation pattern in the determination example AKE03, the fluctuation pattern to be used may be determined at a ratio according to the hit expectation. For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the variation pattern PC1-1 may be determined as the usage pattern at a higher rate than the variation pattern PC1-2. When the variable display result is "hit", the variation pattern PC3-2 may be determined as the usage pattern at a higher rate than the variation pattern PC3-1.

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (D), in the determination example AKE04 in the case where the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the special state is 0, the fluctuation is made if the variable display result of the special symbol is “missing”. Only the pattern PC1-3 is a decidable pattern, and if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", only the variable pattern PC3-3 is a decidable pattern. As shown in FIG. 17-3, the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-3 are both fluctuation patterns in which the special figure fluctuation time is 140000 ms (milliseconds). Therefore, the final variation, which is the final variation display in the special state, has the same special figure variation time depending on whether the variable display result is "missing" or "hit".

As shown in FIG. 17-4 (E), in the determination example AKE05 in the case of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the special state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is “missing”, If only the variable pattern PD1-1 is a decidable pattern and the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 are included in the decidable pattern. As shown in FIG. 17-3, the variation pattern PD1-1 is a variation pattern in which the variation display time is extremely short, such as the special figure variation time of 500 ms. Therefore, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing", the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state is repeatedly started and ended within a short period of time, so that the second hold is performed. The memory is digested. Further, when the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special state has a shorter special symbol variation time than the variable display in other gaming states. Since it is easy to become, it is easy to derive a definite effect symbol of a winning combination in a short period of time.

The special state final variation is the final variation that is the final variation display in the special state. During the execution of the variable display, which is the final variation of the special state, the loss-corresponding effect or the hit-corresponding effect is executed after the acquisition effect, the expectation level increase effect, or the notice effect once or a plurality of times are executed. The acquisition effect is a pre-effect of displaying a specific image of a display number related to the number of stored information on hold, which is the second hold storage. The specific image may be, for example, a panel-shaped effect image showing a character selected from a plurality of types of characters. The expectation level raising effect is a change effect in which the display mode of the specific image can be changed with the occurrence of the second starting prize due to the passing of the game ball through the second starting winning opening 14. However, when the expectation level raising effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the specific image changes and cases where the display mode of the specific image does not change. The one-time or multiple notice effects are specific effects related to the specific image displayed in the acquired effect. The loss-corresponding effect is a loss notification effect that notifies that the display result of the special symbol is a loss symbol and no big hit or small hit occurs. The hit-corresponding effect is a hit notification effect in which the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, and a big hit or a small hit is notified. The loss response effect and the hit response effect are also referred to as the display result response effect. The display result-corresponding effects including the acquisition effect, the expectation increase effect, the notice effect, the loss-adaptive effect, and the hit-adaptive effect are all included in the final variation effect that can be executed in response to the special state final variation.

The final variation effect may include a reproduction display of a moving image or an animation display of a still image to display a background image. The display of the background image included in such a final variation effect may be continuously controlled even after the end of the special state final variation until the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage is completed. For example, the loss response effect and the hit response effect include a reproduction display of a moving image or an animation display of a still image in the display of the background image, and a variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage even after the final variation of the special state is completed. Will continue to run until is finished. As a result, the variation display that is the final variation of the special state and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory give the player the impression that the variation display is a consistent series of variation displays, and the game for each variation display. It is possible to produce an appropriate display that raises the interest of the person.

In the acquisition effect, for example, the maximum display is related to one fluctuation display which is the final fluctuation in the special state and four fluctuation displays corresponding to the upper limit value in the number of stored information which is the second hold storage. It suffices if a specific image having a number of 5 can be displayed. When the execution of the acquisition effect is started, if the number of stored information to be the second reserved storage reaches the upper limit of 4, there are a plurality of types of five specific images corresponding to the maximum number of displayed images. It suffices if it is possible to display a panel-shaped effect image showing a character selected from the characters. A panel-shaped effect image showing a character that can be displayed in the acquired effect is also referred to as a character panel image. The number of displayed character panel images in the acquisition effect may be determined based on the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of stored information stored as the second reserved storage. The value obtained by adding 1 to the number of times the hold information stored in the second hold memory is added is the value obtained by adding 1 which is the number of times the change display is executed, which is the final change in the special state, to the number of times the change display is executed by the second hold memory. Is.

In the advance notice effect, it is sufficient that a battle effect using the character shown in the character panel image can be executed as an effect related to the specific image displayed in the acquisition effect. In the battle production, for example, it is possible to play back a moving image or animate a still image so that the character shown in the character panel image is used as a ally character and a battle with an enemy character different from this ally character is fought. All you need is. In the one-time or multiple advance notice effects, for example, in each advance notice effect, a scene in which a ally character loses a battle with an enemy character is displayed, so that the display result of the special symbol becomes a lost symbol, and a big hit or a small hit. It can be suggested that no hits occur. On the other hand, in each advance notice production, for example, a scene in which a ally character wins a battle with an enemy character is displayed, so that the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, and the big hit or the small hit becomes. It can be suggested that it will occur. In this way, each advance notice effect may indicate that a big hit or a small hit will occur, or may indicate that a big hit or a small hit will not occur, depending on the effect mode such as the display mode of the effect image. There is. The suggestion that a big hit or a small hit does not occur due to the production mode of the advance notice production is also called a loss suggestion. The notice production of the production mode that suggests a loss is also referred to as a loss notice. The suggestion that a big hit or a small hit occurs depending on the production mode of the advance notice effect is also called a hit suggestion. The notice production of the production mode that suggests a hit is also called a hit notice.

The number of display of the specific image in the acquisition effect that is the pre-effect and the number of executions until the hit is suggested in the notice effect are not necessarily the number of stored information that is the second hold memory and the display result of the special symbol is the big hit symbol. Alternatively, it does not have to match the number of executions until the variable display that becomes the small hit symbol. For example, when the execution of the acquisition effect is started, even if the number of stored information stored as the second reserved storage does not reach the upper limit value of 4, as five specific images corresponding to the maximum number of displayed images, Up to five character panel images, which are panel-shaped effect images, may be displayed. In addition, for example, by displaying a scene in which a ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in the second notice production, even if a big hit or a small hit is suggested, the hold information that becomes the second hold memory. Of these, the display result of the special symbol based on the second and subsequent reserved information may be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol.

On the other hand, the number of times the specific image is displayed and the display mode in the acquired effect, which is the pre-effect, are related to the number of times the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, the number of display of the character panel image, which is a specific image in the acquired effect, is determined to be equal to or greater than the number of times the advance notice effect is executed, and may not be less than the number of times the advance notice effect is executed. When a character panel image that is five specific images corresponding to the maximum number of displays is displayed, the first character panel image can suggest a ally character in the first notice production, and the second character. The panel image can suggest a friendly character in the second notice production, the third character panel image can suggest a friendly character in the third notice production, and the fourth character panel image can suggest the fourth character panel image. It is possible to suggest a ally character in the notice effect, and the fifth character panel image can suggest a ally character in the fifth notice effect.

17-5 and 17-6 show the execution period and execution timing of various effects corresponding to the final fluctuation in the special state. Of these, in FIGS. 17-5, in the final fluctuation in the special state and the fluctuation display based on the hold information corresponding to the upper limit value 4 of the second hold storage number, the display result of the special symbol is a lost symbol. In relation to the case of "loss", the execution period and execution timing of various effects including the five advance notice effects are shown. FIG. 17-6 shows a “loss” in which the display result of the special symbol is a lost symbol in both the final variation in the special state and the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to the second reserved memory numbers 1 and 2. Yes, in the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the second hold memory number 3, the notice effect is performed twice in relation to the case where the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. It shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects including. In the hold information stored as the second hold memory, the hold information corresponding to the variable display of "hit" in which the display result of the special symbol is the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is also referred to as specific hold information.

For example, based on the fact that the hit type is determined to be the first special figure big hit C, the display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit", so that it is controlled to the big hit game state, and after the end of this big hit game state, it is special. When controlled by the state, the variation display can be executed three times in the special state. Then, the variation display corresponding to each of the remaining number of times 2 and 1 is executed, and when the display result becomes "missing" in each variation display, the variation display which is the final variation of the special state is started in the timing AKT01. In the variable display of the effect symbol and the small symbol, all the symbol fluctuations in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are changed are started with the start of the final change in the special state. It should be noted that, in response to the start of the final change in the special state, the effect symbol may be hidden so that the effect symbol is not displayed. After that, at the timing AKT02, the execution of the acquisition effect is started, and the number of characters displayed in the panel-shaped effect image as the specific image may increase according to the elapsed time. When the timing AKT03 is reached, the execution of the acquisition effect is completed, the execution of the expectation increase effect is started, and the display mode of the panel-shaped effect image to be a specific image can be changed. In the expectation level raising effect, when the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 14 is detected, the display mode of the specific image may or may not change. When the display mode of a specific image is changed due to the effect of increasing the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation for hitting is increased. Then, at the timing AKT04, the execution of the expectation raising effect is completed.

Next, at the timing AKT11, the execution of the advance notice effect is started. In the case shown in FIG. 17-5, the advance notice effect of each time is executed corresponding to each of the timings AKT11 to AKT15, so that the advance notice effect is executed five times in total. When the 5th notice effect is executed, it is possible to suggest whether the final change in the special state is a hit or a loss by the 1st notice effect, and the 2nd notice effect corresponds to 1 of the second reserved memory number. It is possible to suggest whether the variable display is a hit or a loss, and it is possible to suggest whether the variable display corresponding to 2 of the second reserved memory number is a hit or a loss by the third notice effect, and the second notice effect by the fourth notice effect. It is possible to suggest whether the variable display corresponding to the number of reserved memories 3 is a hit or a loss, and it is possible to suggest whether the variable display corresponding to the second number of reserved memories 4 is a hit or a loss by the fifth notice effect. When all the advance notice effects that suggest loss are executed as the five notice effects, it is possible to suggest that all the change indications corresponding to the special state final change and the second hold memory are lost. However, the number of times the advance notice effect is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed do not exactly match each other, and may be as long as they can be suggested. For example, when any of the variable displays is a hit, the number of times the advance notice effect is executed may be smaller than the number of times the variable display is executed. In this case, it is possible to suggest that the variable display is a hit by the advance notice effect of the number of executions less than the number of executions until the variable display becomes a hit. Further, when any of the variable displays is lost, the number of times the advance notice effect is executed may be larger than the number of times the variable display is executed. In this way, even if the number of executions of the advance notice effect and the number of executions of the variable display are different, the number of executions of each other tends to be close to each other, giving the player an impression that the advance notice effect and the variable display are related. I wish I could.

After the fifth advance notice effect is completed at the timing AKT16 shown in FIG. 17-5, the loss response effect is executed in response to the execution of all the advance notice effects that suggest the loss. Specific notification that the big hit and the small hit are not generated and the big hit game state and the small hit game state are not controlled by executing the notice effect that suggests the loss and the effect corresponding to the loss. Is feasible. After that, for example, when the final stage of the final change of the special state is reached, the result display AKR01 at the time of loss is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The result display at the time of loss AKR01 may be a display effect that allows the player to recognize the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in the small hit game state or the big hit game state until the end of the special state. .. Then, at the timing AKT21, the final fluctuation of the special state ends. Following such a special state final fluctuation, the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion is sequentially executed. In the case shown in FIG. 17-5, in both the final fluctuation in the special state and the fluctuation display based on the hold information corresponding to the upper limit value 4 of the second hold storage number, the display result of the special symbol is a lost symbol. Corresponding to the "loss", in the variable display of the small symbol, the confirmed small symbol of the loss combination is stopped and displayed. In the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage, the variable display result corresponds to "loss", and the variable pattern PD1-1 is determined by the determination example AKE05 shown in FIG. 17-4 (E), and the variable display is short-term. The start and end of the variable display are repeated, and at the timing AKT22, all the variable displays corresponding to the second reserved storage are terminated.

In the case shown in FIG. 17-6, each advance notice effect is executed corresponding to each of the timings AKT1 and AKT12, so that a total of two advance notice effects are executed. Of these, in the first notice production, a loss notice that suggests a loss is executed, and in the second notice production, a hit notice that is a hit suggestion is executed. After the second advance notice effect is completed at the timing AKT13 shown in FIG. 17-6, the hit response effect is executed in response to the execution of the advance notice effect which is the hit advance notice. By executing the advance notice effect that suggests a hit, or by executing the hit response effect, a big hit or a small hit occurs, and the identification that the big hit game state or the small hit game state can be controlled is notified. Notification can be executed. After that, for example, when the final stage of the final fluctuation of the special state is reached, the hit standby display AKR02 is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The hit standby display AKR02 is waiting for the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit, for example, by continuously or temporarily displaying the reproduction display of the moving image which is the background image common to at least a part of the hit correspondence effect. Any display effect that the player can recognize. Then, at the timing AKT21, the final fluctuation of the special state ends. Following such a special state final fluctuation, the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion is sequentially executed. In the case shown in FIG. 17-6, in the final fluctuation in the special state and the fluctuation display in which the second reserved memory number corresponds to 1 and 2, both correspond to "loss" in which the display result of the special symbol is a lost symbol. Then, in the variable display of the small symbol, the confirmed small symbol that is the special display result is stopped and displayed. In the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory number of 3, in the variable display of the small symbol, the fixed small symbol of the hit combination corresponds to the "hit" in which the display result of the special symbol is the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol. Stop is displayed. Further, the variable display result corresponds to "hit" and is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 by the determination example AKE05 shown in FIG. 17-4 (E), and the fluctuation display is performed at the timing AKT31. Is finished and a big hit or a small hit occurs.

In the special state final variation, the variation pattern PC1-3 is determined as the pattern to be used when the display result of the special symbol is "missing", and the variation pattern PC3-3 is determined when the display result of the special symbol is "hit". Determined by usage pattern. Further, in the fluctuation pattern PC1-3, if the display result of the fluctuation display that is the final fluctuation of the special state is "missing", even if all the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage is "missing". , Even if any of the fluctuation display is "hit", it is determined as the usage pattern. Further, among the cases where the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage is "hit", the display result of the fluctuation display which is the final fluctuation of the special state no matter how many times the fluctuation display is "hit". If is "missing", the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 is determined as the usage pattern. The fluctuation pattern PC1-3 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-3 are both fluctuation patterns in which the special figure fluctuation time is 140000 ms. Therefore, the number of times of variable display executed before the variable display based on the specific hold information stored as the second hold storage is the first time and the second time different from the first time. In the final variation of the special state, the variation display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is common. In this way, by making the fluctuation display time in the final variation of the special state constant, it becomes easy to control the effect for executing various effects included in the final variation effect, and the data capacity used for the effect control is reduced. be able to.

FIG. 17-7 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process process (S705). In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 determines a final effect symbol or the like to be the final stop symbol of the effect symbol (AKS011). The final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol, is the display of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 and the special symbol specified by the display result specification command. It can be determined based on the variable display content such as the result. The variable display content corresponding to the display result of the variation pattern or the special symbol may include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "first hit" to "third hit". For example, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a non-reach fluctuation pattern among the loss fluctuation patterns, the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)". Further, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is the reach fluctuation pattern among the loss fluctuation patterns, the variable display content is "reach (loss)". On the other hand, when any of the first special figure jackpot A, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpot via small hit X is specified as the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command. The variable display content is "first hit". Variable when any of the first special figure big hit B, small hit via big hit Y, and small hit via big hit Z is specified as the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command. The displayed content is "second hit". When the hit type of the first special figure jackpot C is specified as the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result designation command, the variable display content is "third hit".

The final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol, is determined so that the left symbol and the right symbol are different and inconsistent effect symbols when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)". The effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data that becomes a left-determined symbol determination random number updated by, for example, a random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores the left-determined symbol determination table in ROM 102 in advance. Of the finalized effect symbols, the left finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 9L may be determined by referring to. Next, the numerical data that becomes the right-determined symbol determination random number updated by the random counter for generating the software random number is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 102 is referred to. Therefore, among the finalized effect symbols, the right finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 9R may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed effect symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed effect symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data that becomes the random number for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random counter for generating the software random number is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 102 is referred to. Therefore, among the finalized effect symbols, the medium finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 9C may be determined.

The final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol, is determined so that the left symbol and the right symbol are the same and match when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". The effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data that becomes a random number for determining the left and right confirmed symbols updated by, for example, a random counter for generating a software random number, and stores the left and right confirmed symbols in advance in the ROM 102 and prepares the left and right confirmed symbol determination table. By referring to, etc., among the finalized effect symbols, the effect symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the effect symbol display area 9L and the effect symbol display area 9R may be determined. Further, by extracting the numerical data that becomes the random number for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random counter for generating the software random number and referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 102 and prepared. , Of the confirmed effect symbols, the middle confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 9C may be determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the middle-fixed effect symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed effect symbol and the right-fixed effect symbol, and the finalized effect symbols are a winning combination, for example, 1 By adding or subtracting an arbitrary value such as, to the symbol number of the medium-fixed effect symbol, the finalized effect symbol may be a reach combination instead of a hit combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle-fixed effect symbol, the symbol difference, which is the difference between the left-fixed effect symbol and the right-fixed effect symbol, may be determined, and the middle-determined effect symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

The final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol, has the same left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol when the variable display content is any of "1st hit" to "3rd hit". It is decided to be a production pattern. For example, when the variable display content is "first hit", it is sufficient that the final effect symbol of the hit combination using the effect symbol of gold 7 can be determined. Further, when the variable display content is "second hit", it is sufficient that the final effect symbol of the hit combination using the effect symbol of red 7 can be determined. When the variable display content is "third hit", the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data that becomes a hit confirmation symbol determination random number updated by, for example, a random counter for generating software random numbers. Subsequently, by referring to the hit confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 102, the final effect symbol of the hit combination using any of the effect symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 can be obtained. It should be possible to decide.

When the variable display content is any of "1st hit" to "3rd hit", it may be decided whether or not to execute the symbol promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. .. In the re-lottery effect, the winning combination of the effect symbols using any of the effect symbols 1 to 6, 8 and 9 is temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display of the effect symbol, so that the winning type is the first. It is possible to recognize that it is a special figure big hit C or a big hit Z via a small hit, and the re-variation that makes the effect symbol variable display again stops the final effect symbol of the hit combination using the effect symbol of gold 7 or red 7. By being displayed, the player can recognizablely notify that the hit type is advantageous to the player. After the effect symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, the final effect symbol of the winning combination using any of the effect symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 is stopped and displayed. In some cases, it is not notified that the hit type will be advantageous to the player. When it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect, the combination of the final effect symbol and the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed before the execution of the re-lottery effect may be determined.

After the finalized effect symbol and the like are determined by AKS011, the small symbol determination process is executed (89AKS01). In the small symbol determination process, a fixed small symbol or the like that is a display result in the variable display of the small symbol is determined. After that, it is determined whether or not it is the final fluctuation of the special state (89AKS51). Then, in the case of the final change in the special state, the start setting for hiding the effect symbol that does not display the effect symbol is set (89AKS52). As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the small symbol as a non-display state in which the effect symbol is not displayed with the execution of the final change in the special state. When starting to hide the effect symbol, for example, by setting the effect symbol non-display flag, it is sufficient to memorize that the effect symbol is in the non-display state.

If the 89AKS51 is not the final variation in the special state, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern PD1-1 (89AKS53). At this time, if it is not the variation pattern PD1-1, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol is not displayed and the effect symbol is not displayed (89AKS54). For example, when the effect symbol non-display flag is on, it may be determined that the effect symbol is not displayed, and when the effect symbol non-display flag is off, it may be determined that the effect symbol is not hidden. When the effect symbol is not displayed in 89AKS54, the normal return setting of the effect symbol display for displaying the effect symbol is set (89AKS55). As a result, after the effect symbol is hidden, the display of the effect symbol can be returned to the normal display state in response to the variation pattern other than the variation pattern PD1-1. In the 89AKS55, for example, by resetting the effect symbol non-display flag, it is sufficient to memorize that the effect symbol is in the normal display state.

Next, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (AKS012). The effect control pattern may include control data for controlling the effect by various effect devices according to the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the effect symbol during the variable display of the effect symbol. When the effect control pattern is determined, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 103 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command (AKS013). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the effect display device 9 to start the fluctuation of the effect symbol or the like (AKS014). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern to the VDP109, the effect symbol changes in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the small symbol display area 9K. It suffices to make it possible to start the fluctuation of the small symbol in. After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (AKS015), and the process ends.

FIG. 17-8 (A1) shows an example of determining a definite effect symbol which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the hit type. In AKS011 of the effect symbol variation start processing, when the variable display content is any one of "first hit" to "third hit", the final effect symbol of the hit combination according to the variable display content is determined. At this time, when the hit type is any of the first special figure big hit A, the second special figure big hit, and the big hit X via the small hit, the variable display content corresponds to the "first hit", and the effect of gold 7 is produced. The final effect symbol of the hit combination using the symbol is determined. In addition, when the hit type is any one of the first special figure big hit B, the big hit Y via the small hit, and the big hit Z via the small hit, the variable display content corresponds to the "second hit", and the red 7 effect symbol is displayed. The final production symbol of the hit combination using is determined. When the hit type is the first special figure big hit C, the variable display content corresponds to the "third hit", and the hit combination using any of the effect symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9. The final production pattern of is decided.

As a result, when the hit type is the first special symbol jackpot A, the effect symbol of gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the effect symbol. The effect symbol of gold 7 is an effect symbol whose display color is gold and shows the number 7. When the hit type is the first special symbol jackpot B, the red 7 effect symbol can be derived as the final stop symbol of the effect symbol. The effect symbol of red 7 is an effect symbol whose display color is red and shows the number 7. When the hit type is the first special figure jackpot C, any of the effect symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the effect symbol. When the hit type is the second special symbol big hit, the effect symbol of gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the effect symbol. When the hit type is the big hit X via the small hit, the effect symbol of gold 7 can be derived as the final stop symbol of the effect symbol. When the hit type is the big hit Y via the small hit, the red 7 effect symbol can be derived as the final stop symbol of the effect symbol. When the hit type is the big hit Z via the small hit, the red 7 effect symbol can be derived as the final stop symbol of the effect symbol.

FIG. 17-8 (A2) shows an example of determining a definite effect symbol which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the fluctuation patterns PC1-3 and PD1-1. The variation pattern PC1-3 is a decidable pattern when the variable display result becomes "missing" in the final variation of the special state. The variation pattern PD1-1 is a decidable pattern when the variable display result is “missing” in the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the special state. In AKS011 of the effect symbol variation start processing, when the variable display result is "loss", the final effect symbol of the loss combination according to the variation pattern is determined. In the determination example of FIG. 17-8 (A2), when the variation pattern PC1-3 is used, the final effect symbol of the reach loss combination is determined. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PD1-1, the definite effect symbol of the non-reach combination is determined. As a result, when the variable display result becomes "missing" in the final fluctuation of the special state, it is possible to derive the final effect symbol of the reach loss combination, while the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage at the end of the special state. If the variable display result is "missing" in, it is possible to derive a definite effect symbol of a non-reach combination. In this way, the variable display result is "lost" in the variable display corresponding to the definite effect symbol that can be derived when the variable display result is "lost" in the final change of the special state and the second reserved storage at the end of the special state. It is possible to derive a display result of a different aspect from the definite effect symbol that can be derived in the case of "" in terms of whether it is a reach loss combination or a non-reach combination.

In the case of the variation pattern PC1-3, the definite effect symbol of the non-reach combination may be determined. For example, in the variation display corresponding to the final variation of the special state and the second reserved storage at the end of the special state, if the variable display result is "missing", it corresponds to the variation pattern PC1-3 and is not displayed. The final effect design of the reach combination is decided. In this case, the variable display result corresponds to "loss" in the final change of the special state, and the definite effect symbol of the non-reach combination can be derived, and further, the change corresponding to the second reserved storage at the end of the special state. In the display, the variable display result corresponds to "loss", and it becomes possible to derive a definite effect symbol of a non-reach combination. In this way, in the variation display corresponding to the final variation of the special state and the second reserved storage at the end of the special state, if the variable display result is "missing", all the definitive effect symbols that can be derived are available. In that it is a non-reach combination, it may be possible to derive a display result of a common aspect.

FIG. 17-8 (B) shows a configuration example of a small symbol that can be displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. In the small symbol display area 9K, similarly to the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, for example, small symbols showing numbers 1 to 9 are variably displayed. Further, the small symbol indicating the number 7 includes a small symbol whose display color is red and indicates the number 7, and a small symbol whose display color is gold and indicates the number 7. A small symbol whose display color is red and shows the number 7 is also called a small symbol of red 7. A small symbol whose display color is gold and shows the number 7 is also called a small symbol of gold 7. The small symbols showing the numbers 1 to 6, 8 and 9 are numbered 1 to 6, 8 and 9, respectively. A symbol number of 7A is attached to the small symbol of red 7. The small symbol of gold 7 is given a symbol number of 7B.

In the small symbol display area 9K, as a confirmed small symbol that is the display result of the small symbol and is the final stop symbol of the small symbol, the small symbol corresponding to the final stop symbol that is the display result of the effect symbol and is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol. May be derivable. For example, in the variable display excluding the final variable in the special state and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the special symbol, the variable display result is determined depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "hit". Derivation of a fixed small symbol corresponding to the production symbol. In addition, in the variable display corresponding to the final change in the special state and the second reserved memory at the end of the special symbol, when the variable display result is "missing" corresponding to all the variable displays, the fixed effect symbol is supported. Derived a definite small symbol. On the other hand, in the variable display corresponding to the final change in the special state and the second reserved memory at the end of the special symbol, when the variable display result is "hit" corresponding to any of the variable displays, the finalized effect symbol is displayed. In some cases, a definite small symbol that is partially different from the above may be derived. The finalized small symbols that are partially different from the finalized effect symbols are the confirmed small symbols that are partly common to the finalized effect symbols, such as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the small symbols that indicate the letter V in the middle symbol. The result is a special display composed of special small symbols that are not included in the fixed small symbols that correspond to the effect symbols.

When a definite small symbol of the hit combination using the small symbol of red 7 is derived as the final stop symbol which is the display result of the small symbol, the effect symbol of red 7 is derived as the final stop symbol which is the display result of the effect symbol. Corresponding to the derivation of the definite effect symbol of the hit combination using It becomes one of the via jackpot Z. When a fixed small symbol of the winning combination using the small symbol of gold 7 is derived as the final stop symbol which is the display result of the small symbol, the effect symbol of gold 7 is derived as the final stop symbol which is the display result of the effect symbol. Corresponding to the derivation of the final effect symbol of the hit combination using It is one of the first special figure big hit A, the second special figure big hit, and the big hit X via the small hit, which is advantageous for the person. In this way, when the player is controlled to have a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, as a result of displaying the effect symbol or the small symbol, the red 7 or gold 7 effect symbol or the small symbol is specified. A specific display result consisting of only symbols is derived.

In the middle symbol, the small symbol indicating the letter V is assigned a symbol number of 10. The small symbol indicating the letter V in the medium symbol is a special symbol that is not included in the small symbols that can be displayed while the variable display is being executed. By deriving a special display result that includes a special small symbol indicating the letter V in the middle symbol as the final stop symbol that is the display result of the small symbol, the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage at the end of the special state In any of the above, the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, and it can be suggested that a big hit or a small hit occurs. In addition, in the fluctuation display that is the final fluctuation of the special state, the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, and when a big hit or a small hit occurs, the temporary stop small symbol using the special small symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be displayed and then changed again to derive a definite small symbol of the winning combination. The small symbol showing the letter V in the middle symbol is also called the V symbol, and is a special symbol for suggesting at the end of the special state. The small symbol indicating the letter V is not limited to the case where it is included in the middle symbol, and may be included in a part or all of the displayable symbol sequence including the left symbol and the right symbol. When it is included in a symbol other than the middle symbol, the small symbol indicating the letter V may be applied to the symbol other than the middle symbol in the following description.

FIG. 17-9 is a flowchart showing a small symbol determination process (89AKS01) in the effect symbol variation start process (S801). In the small symbol determination process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the final stop small corresponding to the final stop symbol which is the display result of the effect symbol as the final stop symbol which is the display result of the small symbol. The design is determined (89AKS11). For example, when the effect symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 9 have the same symbol numbers as the small symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 9 excluding the special small symbols, they are the same as the symbol numbers indicating the final effect symbols. The small symbol with the symbol number of may be determined as the final stop small symbol.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is a setting for hit hold standby (89AKS12). For example, when the hit hold waiting flag is on, it may be determined that there is a hit hold wait setting. The hit hold standby flag may be set and turned on in 89AKS33 of the small symbol change setting process shown in FIG. 17-21. If there is no setting for hit hold standby, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern PC3-3 is the fluctuation pattern in the current fluctuation display (89AKS19). Fluctuation pattern In the case of a variation pattern other than PC3-3, the final small symbol is determined to correspond to the final effect symbol by terminating the process as it is.

When the fluctuation pattern PC3-3 is the fluctuation pattern in the current fluctuation display, a temporary stop small symbol using a special symbol is determined (89AKS20). The temporary stop small symbol is a combination of small symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed before the final display result, which is the display result of the small symbol, is derived while the variable display of the small symbol is being executed. For example, in 89AKS20, among the final stop small symbols determined in 89AKS11, the temporary stop small symbol may be determined by changing the small symbol to be the middle symbol to a special symbol indicating the letter V. Further, in 89AKS20, among the final stop small symbols determined in 89AKS11, the left symbol and the right symbol are also changed to the same small symbol with a different symbol number, and the small symbol that becomes the middle symbol is changed. The temporary stop small symbol may be determined by changing to a small symbol indicating the letter V. The same small symbol with another symbol number to be changed at this time may be a small symbol whose symbol numbers are other than 7A and 7B. Small symbols with symbol numbers 7A and 7B, which are specific symbols, are expected to become a hit type that is advantageous to the player when temporarily stopped and displayed as temporary stop small symbols, and then another symbol number is added. Derivation of the attached fixed small symbol may reduce the expectation of the player. Therefore, when the temporary stop small symbol is determined by 89AKS20, a restriction may be provided so as not to determine the small symbol which is a specific symbol.

When the 89AKS12 is set to be on hold and waiting, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" for this variable display (89AKS13). Here, when the variable display result is "big hit", not only when the hit type is the first special figure big hit A to the first special figure big hit C or the second special figure big hit, but also when the hit type is a small hit. It is also included that the case is from the big hit X to the big hit Z via the small hit. When the variable display result is "big hit", the setting in the hit hold standby is deleted (89AKS14), and the process is terminated. For example, the hit hold wait flag may be reset. As a result, the finalized small symbol is determined to correspond to the finalized effect symbol, and when the subsequent variable display is executed, it is assumed that there is no setting in the hit hold standby.

If the variable display result in 89AKS13 is "missing" and not "big hit", among the final stop small symbols determined in 89AKS11, the small symbol that is the middle symbol is changed to the special symbol indicating the letter V. Change (89AKS16). In this way, although there is a hit hold standby setting, if the variable display result is "missing" instead of "big hit" for this variable display, and no big hit or small hit occurs based on this variable display. , It is possible to derive a special display result in which the middle symbol in the fixed small symbol is changed to a special symbol. In this case, it is determined whether or not the left symbol and the right symbol are a combination of specific symbols in the finalized small symbol (89AKS17). If it is not a combination of specific symbols, the special display result composed of the changes in 89AKS16 can be derived by ending the process. In the case of a combination of specific symbols, in the finalized small symbol, the left symbol or the right symbol is changed to a small symbol other than the specific symbol (89AKS18), and then the process is terminated. As a result, the fixed small symbol different from the special symbol constituting the special display result includes the small symbol different from the specific symbol.

FIG. 17-10 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (S802) in the effect control process process (S705). In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (AKS021). For example, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, it may be determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not the special state is the final variation (AKS022). In the case of the special state final variation, the final variation effect processing is executed (89AKS02). If it is not the final variation of the special state, the effect control according to the effect control pattern is executed (AKS023), and the process ends.

When the variable display time has elapsed in the AKS021, it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (AKS024). At this time, if the symbol confirmation specification command is not received, the process is terminated and the process is waited for. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is performed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation designation command. It may be executed. When a symbol confirmation designation command is received, for example, a display control command is transmitted to the VDP 109, and as a result of displaying the effect symbol or small symbol, the final stop symbol is derived as the final stop symbol. Display control is performed (AKS025). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (AKS026). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) (AKS027), and the process ends.

FIG. 17-11 is a flowchart showing the final variation effect process (89AKS02) in the effect symbol variation process (S802). In the final variation effect process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation starts corresponding to the start of the variation display this time (AKS101). When the fluctuation is started, a setting is made to start the reproduction of the moving image corresponding to the final fluctuation of the special state (AKS102). The moving image corresponding to the special state final variation is continuously reproduced and displayed as a background image during the period in which the variation display corresponding to the special state final variation and the second reserved storage at the end of the special state is executed. Anything that is possible will do. An animation display of a still image may be executed instead of the reproduction display of the moving image or together with the reproduction display of the moving image.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the acquisition effect period (AKS103). The acquisition effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined by AKS012 of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is the acquisition effect period, the acquisition effect process is executed (AKS104). In addition, it is determined whether or not it is the expected degree raising production period (AKS105). The expected degree increase effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined by AKS012 of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is the expectation increase effect period, the expectation increase effect process is executed (AKS106). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice production period (AKS107). The advance notice effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined by AKS012 of the effect symbol variation start process. Alternatively, the advance notice effect period may be set according to the number of times the advance notice is executed determined by the acquisition effect processing. If it is the advance notice effect period, the advance notice effect process is executed (AKS108). After that, it is determined whether or not the display result corresponding effect period is reached (AKS109). The display result corresponding effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined by AKS012 of the effect symbol variation start process. However, the display result corresponding effect period may be set according to the advance notice effect period so that it can be started when the advance notice effect period ends. When it is the display result corresponding effect period, the display result corresponding effect process is executed (AKS110).

FIG. 17-12 is a flowchart showing the acquisition effect processing (AKS104) in the final variation effect process (89AKS02). In the acquisition effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the acquisition effect is started corresponding to the start of the acquisition effect (AKS201). If the acquisition effect has started, the pending data is confirmed (AKS202). The hold data is stored data that can specify the notification content of the symbol designation command transmitted from the main board 31, and may be stored and saved in the storage area of the hold-related data storage unit provided in the RAM 103. After that, based on the confirmation result of the reserved data, the presence / absence of the winning notice and the winning notice number are determined (90AKS01). The hit notice is a notice effect of hit suggestion that suggests that a big hit or a small hit will occur. The hit notice number is a number indicating the order in which the notice effects that are the hit notices are executed among the plurality of notice effects.

Next, as a result of the determination by 90AKS01, it is determined whether or not there is no hit notice without executing the notice effect which is a hit notice (90AKS02). If there is no hit notice, the number of times the notice is executed at the time of loss is determined (90AKS03). The number of times the notice is executed at the time of loss is the number of times the notice effect that becomes the loss notice is executed. The loss notice is a notice effect of the loss suggestion that suggests that a big hit or a small hit does not occur. Execution of a notice effect that is a hit notice If there is a hit notice, the number of times the notice is executed corresponding to the hit notice number is set (90AKS04). In addition, the small symbol variation setting process is executed (89AKS03).

Subsequently, the acquired character determination process is executed (90AKS05). In the acquired character determination process, it is possible to determine the number of displayed character panel images that are specific images in the acquisition effect and the characters shown in each character panel image. The number of displayed character panel images, which is a specific image in the acquisition effect, is also referred to as the number of acquired characters. The character shown in each character panel image is also referred to as a notice character. The notice character may be a hit notice character when the hit notice is executed, or may be a loss notice character when the loss notice is executed. After executing the acquisition character determination process, control is performed to start the acquisition promotion notification (AKS203). For example, it is sufficient that the acquisition promotion notification can be executed by displaying the effect image of the display mode corresponding to the acquisition promotion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9. Along with the display of the effect image, the acquisition promotion notification may be executed by voice output, lamp lighting, movement of a moving object, or a combination of a part or all of them. In addition, control is performed to start the timer update display (AKS204). For example, at the timer display position on the screen of the effect display device 9, the timer display of "20:00" indicating the remaining 20 seconds may be started, and the timer display may be counted down according to the elapsed time.

When the acquisition effect is not started in AKS201, it is determined whether or not the acquisition character is increasing timing (90AKS06). The timing of increasing the acquired characters may be set in advance, for example, when the acquired character determination process (90AKS05) is executed, based on the number of acquired characters, the determination result of the advance character, and the like. When it is the timing of increasing the acquired characters, control is performed to notify the increase of the acquired characters (90AKS07). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a second start prize (90AKS08). For example, when the second start prize designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, it may be determined that the second start prize has been given. The second start winning prize designation command is for effect control when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state even when the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value in the start port switch passing process (S311). It suffices if it can be transmitted to the microcomputer 100. When there is a second start winning, control is performed to execute the winning notification effect (90AKS09).

After that, it is determined whether or not to end the acquisition effect (AKS205). For example, when the end of the acquisition effect is specified based on the control data read from the acquisition effect control pattern, it may be determined that the acquisition effect is ended. If the acquisition effect is not finished, the process is finished. On the other hand, when the acquisition effect is ended, control is performed to end the acquisition promotion notification (AKS206). Further, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired characters is 5, which is the maximum value (AKS207). If the number of acquired characters is other than 5, the process ends. When the number of acquired characters is 5, control is performed to execute the acquisition completion notification (AKS208). For example, it is sufficient that the acquisition completion notification can be executed by displaying the effect image of the display mode corresponding to the acquisition completion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9. Along with the display of the effect image, the acquisition completion notification may be executed by voice output, lamp lighting, movement of a moving object, or a combination of a part or all of them.

FIG. 17-13 shows a display example when the acquisition effect is executed. FIG. 17-13 (A) shows a display example 90AK01 when the acquisition effect is started. When the acquisition effect is executed, panel preparation images are displayed at the five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5 shown in FIG. 17-13 (A) on the screen of the effect display device 9, and the notification display position 90AKB1 is displayed. The acquisition promotion notification image is displayed, and the timer image is displayed at the timer display position 90AKC1. The panel preparation image is an effect image indicating that the character panel image can be displayed in the acquisition effect. For example, corresponding to the maximum number of character panel images displayed being 5, panel preparation images showing numbers 1 to 5 are displayed in a predetermined order at the five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5. Just do it. The acquisition promotion notification image is an effect image for promoting the launch of the game ball aiming at the second start winning opening 14 during the execution of the acquisition effect. The acquisition promotion notification image is displayed together with the production image of the right-handed promotion notification in the right-handed display area 9Z, so that the game ball is driven into the right-handed route which is the second route provided with the second start winning opening 14. You may promote right-handed hitting. In the display example 90AK01, the acquisition promotion notification image including the character image indicating the message "Collect characters!" Is displayed at the notification display position 90AKB1. The timer image is an effect image for executing a timer display that counts down according to the elapsed time from the start of the acquisition effect. In the display example 90AK01, at the timer display position 90AKC1, a timer image for starting the timer display of "20:00" indicating the remaining 20 seconds is displayed.

FIG. 17-13 (B) shows a display example 90AK02 in which the acquisition effect is in progress. In the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, when the increase timing of the acquired characters is set at 90AKS06, the increase of the acquired characters is notified by the control of 90AKS07. In the display example 90AKA02, when the third character panel image is displayed, the display at the panel display position 90AKA3 is changed from the display of the panel preparation image to the display of the character panel image. At this time, an increasing effect display may be performed to notify the increase of the acquired characters. The increasing effect display may include displaying a first effect image added around the increased character panel image and displaying a second effect image different from the first effect image. In the second effect image, for example, the characters increased from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9 corresponding to the arrangement position where the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the right-handed path which is the second path. Any production image showing how the action is applied toward the panel image may be used. By displaying such an effect image, it is possible to give the player the impression that the number of displayed character panel images has increased in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14. However, in reality, the timing of increasing the acquired characters is set in advance when the acquired character determination process of 90AKS05 is executed in the acquired effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12. Therefore, in the acquisition effect, regardless of whether the game ball enters or does not enter the second start winning opening 14, the number of displayed character panel images as specific images is increased when the preset acquisition timing is reached. Can be made to. In this way, in the acquisition effect, while giving the impression that the player is involved in the increase in the acquired characters by displaying the effect image, the character panel image of the display number determined based on the second reserved memory number or the like is surely displayed. Can be made to.

The mode of producing the acquisition promotion notification may be different depending on whether the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value of 4 or not. In the acquisition effect processing AKS203 shown in FIG. 17-12, it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is the upper limit value. Depending on the determination result, the display mode of the effect image, the sound output mode, the lamp lighting mode, the movable object operation mode, or a part or all of these combinations are set differently. For example, when the second reserved storage number is not the upper limit value, the display size of the effect image is made larger than when it is the upper limit value, or the effect image including a character image showing a different message "insufficient power!" It suffices to be able to execute arbitrary acquisition promotion notifications having different production modes, such as displaying the image or displaying the image in a different display color such as red, which is different from the normal black color. When the second reserved storage number is not the upper limit value, the acquisition promotion notification may be a special promotion notification.

FIG. 17-13 (C) shows a display example 90AK03 when the acquisition effect ends. In the acquisition effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-12, when the acquisition effect is ended in AKS205, the acquisition promotion notification is terminated by the control of AKS206. In the display example 90AK03, at the notification display position 90AKB2, the acquisition promotion notification is terminated by erasing the display of the acquisition promotion notification image. Further, in the acquisition effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-12, when the number of acquired characters is 5 in AKS207, the acquisition completion notification is executed under the control of AKS208. In the display example 90AK03, the acquisition completion notification image is displayed at the notification display position 90AKB2. The acquisition completion notification image is an effect image for notifying that the number of displayed character panel images, which is a specific image, has reached the maximum display number of 5. In the display example 90AK03, the acquisition completion notification image including the character image indicating the message "acquisition completed!" Is displayed at the notification display position 90AKB2. By executing such acquisition completion notification, the player can recognize that the number of displayed specific images has reached the maximum value.

FIG. 17-14 shows a setting example of a character panel image that can be displayed as a specific image. The character panel image includes a panel frame partial image which is an effect image in which the display color of the panel frame serving as an outer frame can be set, and a character partial image which is an effect image showing a character in a display area in the panel frame. It is composed of. For the panel frame partial image, for example, a white effect image is displayed as a normal display color. When the character panel image is displayed in the acquisition effect, the character panel image including the white panel frame partial image is displayed. Further, the panel frame partial image can be changed to a red or gold effect image different from white, for example, as a display color after the change when the expectation increase effect is executed.

17-14 (A1) to (E1) show character panel images including a white panel frame partial image. 17-14 (A2) to (E2) show a character panel image including a red panel frame partial image. 17-14 (A3) to (E3) show character panel images including a golden panel frame partial image. 17-14 (A1), (A2), and (A3) show a character panel image including a character partial image of the first character AKC1. 17-14 (B1) (B2) (B3) show a character panel image including a character partial image of the second character AKC2. 17-14 (C1) (C2) (C3) show a character panel image including a character partial image of the third character AKC3. 17-14 (D1) (D2) (D3) show a character panel image including a character partial image of the fourth character AKC4. 17-14 (E1) (E2) (E3) show a character panel image including a character partial image of the fifth character AKC5.

Regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition effect, when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, the expectation is highest, and the fourth character AKC4 and the third character The hit expectation decreases as the characters become AKC3 and the second character AKC2, and the hit expectation becomes the lowest when the character panel image including the character partial image of the first character AKC1 is displayed. Further, regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition effect, when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, the advantage of the special state becomes the highest, and the fourth character AKC4 , The advantage of the special state decreases as the character becomes the third character AKC3 and the second character AKC2, and the advantage of the special state is the lowest when the character panel image including the character partial image of the first character AKC1 is displayed. Become. In the variation display of the second special symbol, when the hit type is the jackpot X via the small hit, the number of variable displays that can be executed in the special state is 100 as the post-hit control state, and the hit type is the jackpot Y via the small hit. Alternatively, in the case of the big hit Z via the small hit, the number of variable display times that can be executed in the special state is 15 times as the post-hit control state. Therefore, the higher the ratio of the hit type being the big hit X via the small hit, the higher the advantage of the special state, and the higher the ratio of the hit type being the big hit Y via the small hit or the big hit Z via the small hit, the higher the special state. The advantage is low. It should be noted that the high-low relationship between the hit expectation degree and the advantage degree of the special state regarding the character partial image is a relationship established when the character panel images including the panel frame partial image having the same display color are compared, and the display colors are different. It may not be established when comparing character panel images including panel frame partial images.

Regarding the panel frame partial image included in the character panel image, when the character panel image including the golden panel frame partial image is displayed, the expectation is highest, and the character panel image including the red panel frame partial image is displayed. When this is done, the hit expectation is the second highest after gold, and when the character panel image including the white panel frame partial image is displayed, the hit expectation is the lowest. The high-low relationship of the hit expectation with respect to the panel frame partial image is a relationship established when the character panel images including the character partial images having the same character are compared, and the character panel image including the character partial images having different characters. May not hold when comparing.

FIG. 17-15 (A) shows a configuration example of the hold-related data storage unit AKM01 provided in the RAM 103. The hold-related data storage unit AKM01 stores various data related to the first hold storage and various data related to the second hold storage as hold-related data. As the hold-related data storage unit AKM01, the first hold-related data storage unit corresponding to the first hold storage related to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second hold storage related to the change display of the second special symbol related to the second special symbol A corresponding second hold-related data storage unit may be provided. The hold-related data storage unit AKM01 secures, for example, a storage area for storing data that can identify the symbol designation and the variation type designation in association with the hold number. The symbol designation that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the content of the notification by the symbol designation command. The variable type specification that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the content specified by the variable type command. In the acquisition effect processing AKS202 shown in FIG. 17-12, the hold-related data stored in the second hold-related data storage unit of the hold-related data storage unit AKM01 may be confirmed as hold data.

The hold data may be confirmed, for example, when the variable display corresponding to the final variation of the special state is started, not limited to the case where the acquisition effect is started. Alternatively, even after the acquisition effect is started, the hold data may be confirmed each time the second start winning prize is generated, and the effect mode such as the acquisition effect may be changed.

FIG. 17-15 (B) shows a configuration example of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 provided in the RAM 103. The final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 stores various data used for executing the final variation effect as final variation effect data. The final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 secures, for example, a storage area for storing data that can identify the character, the outer frame, the expectation increase setting, and the notice content in association with the notice number. The notice numbers correspond to the order in which the notice effects are executed in the final variable effect. As the character that can be stored by the final variation effect data, the character indicated by the character partial image included in the character panel image is specified. The outer frame that can be stored by the final variation effect data specifies the display color of the panel frame partial image included in the character panel image. The expectation increase setting that can be stored by the final variation effect data specifies a condition for changing the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation increase effect and a display color after the change. The notice content that can be memorized by the final variation effect data specifies whether the suggestion by the notice effect is a loss suggestion or a hit suggestion. The effect control CPU 101 stores and stores the final variation effect data according to the determination result of the effect content in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 when the execution of the acquisition effect or the expectation increase effect is started. do it.

FIG. 17-16 (A) shows a determination example 90AKD01 of the hit notice timing. The hit notice timing is the timing at which the notice effect that becomes the hit notice is executed. In the acquisition effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-12, by determining the hit notice number in 90AKS01, the hit notice timing according to the order of the notice effect is determined. When executing the notice effect that is a hit notice, the fluctuation display that becomes the hit fluctuation from which the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived is specified. When the final variation in the special state is executed, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not the variation display that is the final variation becomes a hit variation from the contents specified by the display result designation command. Further, by reading the symbol designation of the hold-related data stored in the hold-related data storage unit AKM01, the hold number of the fluctuation display that becomes the hit fluctuation may be specified. If there are multiple hit fluctuations, the fluctuation display that is executed first is used. When the hit notice number is 1, as the first notice effect, the hit notice of the effect mode suggesting a hit is executed. When the hit notice number is 2, the hit notice is executed as the second notice effect. When the hit notice number is 3, the hit notice is executed as the third notice effect. When the hit notice number is 4, the hit notice is executed as the fourth notice effect. When the hit notice number is 5, the hit notice is executed as the fifth notice effect.

In the determination example 90AKD01, when the hit variation is the final variation in the special state, the hit notice number is determined to be 1 with a determination rate of 100%. When the hit fluctuation is the first of the second hold memory, that is, when the hold number is a fluctuation display of 1, the hit notice number is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 70%, and the hit notice is given with a decision rate of 30%. The number is determined to be 2. When the hit fluctuation is the second of the second hold memory, that is, when the hold number is a fluctuation display of 2, the hit notice number is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 30%, and the hit notice is given with a decision rate of 60%. The number is determined to be 2, and the winning notice number is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 10%. When the hit fluctuation is the third of the second hold memory, that is, when the hold number is a fluctuation display of 3, the hit notice number is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 10%, and the hit notice is given with a decision rate of 30%. The number is determined to be 2, the winning notice number is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 50%, and the winning advance notice number is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 10%. When the hit fluctuation is the fourth of the second hold memory, that is, when the hold number is a fluctuation display of 4, the hit notice number is determined to be 1 with a decision rate of 10%, and the hit notice is given with a decision rate of 10%. The number is decided to be 2, the winning notice number is decided to be 3 with a decision rate of 30%, the winning notice number is decided to be 4 with a decision rate of 40%, and the winning notice number is decided to be 5 with a decision rate of 10%. Will be done. If there is no hit fluctuation, the hit notice number is not determined and the notice effect that serves as a hit notice is not executed.

As described above, in the determination example 90AKD01, when the value obtained by adding 1 to the hold number corresponding to the fluctuation display that becomes the hit fluctuation is set as the corresponding notice value, the hit hold number is set to a value equal to or less than the corresponding notice value. The decision rate is set in. In addition, the winning hold number has a higher determination rate of a value less than the corresponding advance notice value than the determination rate of the corresponding advance notice value. With such a setting, the number of times the advance notice effect is executed tends to be smaller than the total number of times the fluctuation display that becomes the hit fluctuation and the fluctuation display that is executed before the hit fluctuation. As a result, the degree of freedom in controlling the advance notice effect is increased without being bound by the correspondence between the advance notice effect and the variable display, and the period until the advance notice effect that suggests a hit is executed is shortened, so that the player can use it. It is possible to prevent giving the impression of being extended. In addition, it is not limited to the decision rate in the determination example 90AKD01, the hit hold number is determined to be a value equal to or less than the corresponding notice value, and the hit notice number is determined to be a value less than the corresponding notice value than the ratio determined to the corresponding notice value. It suffices if an arbitrary decision rate is set so that the rate is high.

Unlike the determination example 90AKD01, the winning advance notice number may be determined so as to exceed the corresponding advance notice value. In this case, the number of times the advance notice effect is executed is larger than the total number of times the fluctuation display that becomes the hit fluctuation and the fluctuation display that is executed before the hit fluctuation. As a result, the degree of freedom in controlling the advance notice effect is increased without being bound by the correspondence between the advance notice effect and the variable display, and the period until the advance notice effect that suggests a hit is executed is extended. It is possible to maintain attention to the advance notice production.

FIG. 17-16 (B) shows a determination example 90AKD02 of the number of times of notice execution at the time of loss. The number of times the notice is executed at the time of loss is the number of times that the notice effect that is the loss notice is executed when the notice effect that is the hit notice is not executed. In the acquisition effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-12, the number of times of notice execution at the time of loss is determined by 90AKS03. In 90AKS03, the number of advance notice executions is determined based on the second reserved storage number. In the determination example 90AKD02, when the second reserved storage number is 0, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 1 with a determination rate of 10%, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 2 with a determination rate of 40%, and 30%. The number of advance notice executions is determined to be 3 by the decision rate, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 4 by the decision rate of 10%, and the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 5 by the decision rate of 10%. When the second reserved memory number is 1, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 2 with a decision rate of 10%, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 3 with a decision rate of 50%, and a notice is given with a decision rate of 30%. The number of executions is determined to be 4, and the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 10%. When the second reserved memory number is 2, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 3 with a decision rate of 10%, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 4 with a decision rate of 60%, and the advance notice is determined with a decision rate of 30%. The number of executions is determined to be 5. When the second reserved storage number is 3, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 30%, and the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 70%. When the second reserved storage number is 4, the number of advance notice executions is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 100%.

In this way, in the determination example 90AKD02, the determination rate is set so that the number of times the advance notice is executed becomes a value equal to or greater than the corresponding advance notice value when the value obtained by adding 1 to the second reserved storage number is set as the corresponding advance notice value. Has been done. Further, as for the number of times the advance notice is executed, the determination rate of the value exceeding the corresponding advance notice value is higher than the determination rate of the corresponding advance notice value. With these settings, if all the variable display results corresponding to the special state final fluctuation and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage are "missing", the fluctuation corresponding to the special state final fluctuation and the second reserved storage The number of times the notice effect is executed tends to be larger than the total number of times with the display. As a result, without being bound by the correspondence between the notice effect and the variation display, the degree of freedom in controlling the advance notice effect is increased, and the period during which the advance notice effect that suggests a loss is executed is extended, so that the player can deal with the hit variation. Can sustain the expectation of. In addition, it is not limited to the decision rate in the determination example 90AKD02, the number of times the notice for loss is executed is equal to or more than the corresponding notice value, and the number of times the notice for loss is executed exceeds the corresponding notice value than the ratio determined as the corresponding notice value. Any decision rate may be set so that the rate of determination of the value is high.

In the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 stores the final variation effect data indicating the determination result of the hit notice number by 90AKS01 and the determination result of the number of times of the loss notice execution by 90AKS03. You can memorize it in and save it. For example, when the hit notice number is determined by 90AKS01, the final change effect data storage unit AKM02 stores the final change effect data for which the hit suggestion is specified as the notice content in association with the notice number that becomes the hit notice number. Store and save in the area. In this case, the final variation effect data for which the loss suggestion is specified as the advance notice content is stored and stored in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with the advance notice number smaller than the hit advance notice number. As a result, when the number of times the notice is executed corresponding to the hit notice number is set in 90AKS04 of the acquisition effect processing, the loss notice that suggests the loss is executed as the notice effect that is executed before the hit notice. Can be set. In addition, when the number of times of notice execution at the time of loss is determined by 90AKS03, the final fluctuation effect data for which the suggestion of loss is specified as the content of the notice is associated with the notice number that is equal to or less than the number of times the notice is executed at the time of loss. It is stored and stored in the storage area of the storage unit AKM02. As a result, it is possible to set so that the loss notice that suggests the loss is executed as one or a plurality of notice effects corresponding to the number of times the notice is executed at the time of loss.

FIG. 17-17 is a flowchart showing the acquired character determination process (90AKS05) in the acquisition effect process (AKS104). In the acquired character determination process, the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of acquired characters (91AKS01). The number of acquired characters is the number of displayed character panel images that are specific images in the acquired effect. In the 91AKS01, for example, the number of acquired characters may be determined depending on whether or not a notice effect that is a hit notice is executed. Subsequently, 1 is set in the target notice number (90AKS11). The target advance notice number in the acquired character determination process is, for example, the target of determination regarding the character in the acquired effect or the advance notice effect among the advance notice numbers associated with the storage area of the final variation effect data in the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02. The notice number is specified.

Next, it is determined whether or not the target notice number is a hit notice number (90AKS12). The winning notice number can be determined by 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12. Then, in the case of a hit notice number, the hit notice character is determined (90AKS13). On the other hand, if it is not a hit notice number, a character for notice of loss is determined (90AKS14). Both the hit notice character and the loss notice character can be determined to be any of the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5. At this time, it is determined whether or not the character determined as the hit notice character or the loss notice character is any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 (90AKS15). In the case of any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the character of the residual notice number is determined to be either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 (90AKS16). The final variation effect data indicating the determination result by 90AKS14 or 90AKS15 and 90AKS16 may be stored and stored in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with the target advance notice number and the advance notice number to be the residual advance notice number. .. In the case of 90AKS15, when any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the character of the residual notice number is determined to be either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 in 90AKS16. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hit expectation from being excessively increased depending on the display mode of the character panel image displayed in the acquisition effect. Further, even if a plurality of hold information that becomes the specific hold information is stored among the hold information that becomes the second hold storage, the characters from the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 are determined only once, so that a big hit. It is possible to prevent the player from being able to repeatedly recognize that the player is repeatedly controlled to an advantageous state such as a gaming state or a small hit gaming state at an early stage, and to produce an appropriate display effect that maintains the expectation for the advantageous state.

The character panel image including the character partial image of any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 is a character panel including the character partial image of the character which is either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2. The hit expectation and the advantage of the special state are higher than the image. In the acquisition effect, a range is defined in which a character panel image including a character partial image of a character having a high degree of hit expectation or an advantage in a special state is displayed as a character panel image showing one of a plurality of acquired characters. As the character panel image showing the acquired character after that, the character panel image including the character partial image of the character having a high degree of hit expectation and the advantage of the special state is not displayed, which is a limit limit.

If the 90AKS15 is either the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 and is neither the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, it is determined whether or not the target notice number is the number of times the notice is executed. (90AKS17). If it is not the number of times the notice is executed, the target notice number is incremented by 1 (90AKS18). After that, the process is returned to 90AKS12, and the acquired characters are sequentially determined. Finally, the acquisition character increase timing is set (90AKS19), and the process ends.

FIG. 17-18 shows a determination example 91AKD01 of the number of acquired characters. In the acquired character determination process shown in FIGS. 17-17, the number of acquired characters is determined by 91AKS01. In the determination example 91AKD01, if there is no hit notice that does not include the notice effect that is a hit notice among the one or more notice effects executed in the final variation display, the number is the same as the number of times the notice is executed. The number of acquired characters is determined. Therefore, when a notice effect that is a loss notice is executed as one or a plurality of notice effects, the number of character panel images corresponding to the number of times the notice effect is executed can be displayed in the acquisition effect.

In the determination example 91AKD01, if there is a hit notice that includes a notice effect that is a hit notice among the one or more notice effects executed in the final variation display, it corresponds to the second reserved storage number. The number of acquired characters is determined by the determination rate. For example, when the second reserved storage number is 0, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 1 with a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 2 with a determination rate of 40%, and the determination rate is 30%. The number of acquired characters is determined to be 3, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 10%, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 10%. When the second reserved memory number is 1, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 2 with a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 50%, and the number of acquired characters is determined with a determination rate of 30%. The number of characters is determined to be 4, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 10%. When the second reserved memory number is 2, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 3 with a determination rate of 10%, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 60%, and the number of acquired characters is determined with a determination rate of 30%. The number of characters is determined to be 5. When the second reserved memory number is 3, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 4 with a determination rate of 30%, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 70%. When the second reserved memory number is 4, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5 with a determination rate of 100%.

As described above, in the determination example 91AKD01, the number of acquired characters is determined to be the same as the number of times the advance notice is executed when there is no notice of winning. Further, in the determination example 91AKD01, the determination rate is set so that the number of acquired characters is equal to or greater than the corresponding advance notice value for the corresponding advance notice value obtained by adding 1 to the second reserved storage number when there is a hit advance notice. Has been done. As for the number of acquired characters, the determination rate of the value exceeding the corresponding advance notice value is higher than the determination rate of the corresponding advance notice value. Such a setting is common to the setting of the determination rate in the determination example 90AKD02 of the number of times of advance notice at the time of loss shown in FIG. 17-16 (B). Therefore, the number of acquired characters can be determined by a common determination rate for each corresponding advance notice value in the case where there is no hit notice and the case where there is a hit notice. As a result, in the acquisition effect, the number of displayed character panel images as specific images does not indicate the degree of expectation, and it is possible to prevent the player's attention level from decreasing when the character panel image is displayed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the subsequent production. In addition, since the number of acquired characters is determined by the determination rate according to the second reserved memory number regardless of the winning advance notice number, the freedom in controlling the acquired effect is not restricted by the correspondence between the advance notice effect and the variable display. The degree can be increased. In addition, it is not limited to the determination rate in the determination example 91AKD01, the number of acquired characters is determined to be a value equal to or more than the corresponding notice value, and the number of acquired characters is determined to be a value exceeding the corresponding advance notice value rather than the ratio determined to be the corresponding advance notice value. It suffices if an arbitrary decision rate is set so that the rate is high.

The number of acquired characters and the number of second reserved storage are related in that the number of acquired characters can be determined to be the same value as the corresponding advance notice value. Further, even when the number of acquired characters is determined to be a value that exceeds the corresponding advance notice value, the closer the value is to the corresponding advance notice value, the higher the number of acquired characters is determined. As described above, the number of acquired characters and the number of second reserved storage are related to each other in that the number of acquired characters is easily determined to be close to the corresponding notice value. As a result, in the acquisition effect, it is possible to display the character panel image of the display number related to the number of stored information on hold, which is the second hold storage.

In the determination example 91AKD01, when the second reserved storage number is 4, the number of acquired characters is determined to be 5. The acquired character determination process is executed by 90AKS05 when the acquisition effect is started in AKS201 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 17-12. Therefore, if the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value of 4 when the acquisition effect is started, the number of acquired characters even if the game ball does not pass through the second start winning opening 14 thereafter. Since is determined to be 5, the number of character panel images displayed in the acquisition effect becomes 5, which is the maximum number of displays, and 5 character panel images corresponding to the 5 times notice effect can be displayed.

FIG. 17-19 (A) shows a determination example 90AKD11 of the hit warning character. In the acquired character determination process shown in FIGS. 17-17, the winning advance character is determined at 90AKS12. In the determination example 90AKD11, the winning advance character is determined at the determination rate according to the winning type of the symbol designation stored in the hold-related data. For example, when the hit type of the symbol designation is the second special figure jackpot or the jackpot X via the small hit, the first character AKC1 is determined as the hit advance character with a determination rate of 5%, and the determination rate is 10%. The second character AKC2 is determined as the hit notice character, the third character AKC3 is determined as the hit notice character with a determination rate of 15%, and the fourth character AKC4 is determined as the hit advance notice character with a determination rate of 20%. , The fifth character AKC5 is determined as the winning advance character with a determination rate of 50%. When the hit type of the symbol designation is the big hit Y via the small hit, the first character AKC1 is decided as the hit notice character with a decision rate of 10%, and the second character AKC2 is decided as the hit notice character with a decision rate of 15%. It is decided as a character, the third character AKC3 is decided as a hit notice character with a decision rate of 20%, the fourth character AKC4 is decided as a hit notice character with a decision rate of 35%, and the third character AKC4 is decided as a hit notice character with a decision rate of 20%. The 5 character AKC5 is determined as the winning advance notice character. When the hit type of the symbol designation is the big hit Z via the small hit, any one of the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5 is determined as the hit notice character with a determination rate of 20%.

As described above, in the determination example 90AKD11, the hit type of the symbol designation is the second special figure big hit or the big hit X via the small hit, the big hit Y via the small hit, and the big hit Z via the small hit. Therefore, the determination rate of the winning notice character is different. The hit notice character is shown in one of the character panel images displayed in the acquisition effect, and then in the notice effect related to the character panel image showing the hit notice character, the hit notice is a hit suggestion notice effect. Is executed. When the hit type is either the second special figure big hit or the big hit X via the small hit, it is possible to control the special state as the post-hit control state until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches 100 times. When the hit type is either the big hit Y via the small hit or the big hit Z via the small hit, it is possible to control the special state as the post-hit control state until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches 15 times. Further, when the hit type is the big hit Y via the small hit, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is 10, and the round in which the V big winning opening is open can be executed up to 10 times. When the hit type is the big hit Z via the small hit, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is 5, and the round in which the big winning opening is open can be executed up to 5 times. Therefore, depending on which character from the first character AKC1 to the fifth character AKC5 is the hit advance notice character, the advantage in the big hit game state and the post-hit control state is different, so that the advantage for the player is the same. Is different. It should be noted that the determination rate is not limited to the determination example 90AKD11, and an arbitrary determination rate may be set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the winning advance character.

FIG. 17-19 (B) shows a determination example 90AKD12 of the loss warning character. In the acquired character determination process shown in FIGS. 17-17, the loss notice character is determined at 90AKS13. In the determination example 90AKD12, the character for the loss notice is determined at the determination rate according to the loss notice. For example, the first character AKC1 is determined as the loss notice character with a decision rate of 40%, the second character AKC2 is determined as the loss notice character with a decision rate of 30%, and the third character AKC3 is determined as the loss notice character with a decision rate of 20%. Is determined as the loss notice character, the fourth character AKC4 is determined as the loss notice character with a determination rate of 9%, and the fifth character AKC5 is determined as the loss advance notice character with a determination rate of 1%.

As described above, in the determination example 90AKD12, the determination rate of the first character AKC1 becomes the highest, and the determination rate decreases as the second character AKC2, the third character AKC3, and the fourth character AKC4 become, and the determination rate of the fifth character AKC5 becomes higher. The decision rate is the lowest. By setting the determination rate in the determination examples 90AKD11 and 90AKD12, regarding the character partial image included in the character panel image, in the acquisition effect, when the character panel image including the character partial image of the fifth character AKC5 is displayed, the degree of expectation is increased. It becomes the highest, and the hit expectation decreases as it becomes the fourth character AKC4, the third character AKC3, and the second character AKC2, and the hit expectation when the character panel image including the character partial image of the first character AKC1 is displayed. The degree is the lowest. In addition, in the notice effect related to the character panel image showing the character for loss notice, the loss notice, which is the notice effect of suggesting the loss, is executed. Therefore, in the advance notice effect, the ratio of the loss suggestion or the hit suggestion is different depending on the character indicated by the character panel image displayed in the acquisition effect. It should be noted that the decision rate is not limited to the decision rate in the decision example 90AKD12, and an arbitrary decision rate is set so that the ratio of whether the related notice effect is a loss notice or a hit notice differs depending on the character shown in the character panel image. It suffices if it is set.

FIG. 17-20 shows a control example 90AKE01 of the acquisition effect. The acquisition effect is executed in the period from timing AKT02 to timing AKT03 also shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6. This period may be a period until a certain time elapses, for example, 10 seconds. In the acquired character determination process shown in FIGS. 17-17, the acquired character increase timing is set at 90AKS19. The acquired character increase timing is a timing at which the display is updated so that the number of displayed character panel images as specific images increases in the acquired effect. As shown in FIG. 17-13 (B), when the number of displayed character panel images increases due to the change from the display of the panel preparation image to the display of the character panel image, the effect image is displayed. It is possible to give the player the impression that the number of displayed character panel images has increased in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14. On the other hand, the acquisition character increase timing is preset in 90AKS19 of the acquisition character determination process, and in the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, when the acquisition character increase timing is in 90AKS06, it is controlled by 90AKS07. It is possible to notify the increase of acquired characters. Therefore, the timing at which the number of displayed character panel images increases does not affect the case where the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and the case where the game ball does not enter.

The acquisition character increase timing may be fixedly or variably set so that, for example, the interval between the front and back is 0.5 seconds or more and 1.5 seconds or less. In the control example 90AKE01, timings 90AKT01 to 90AKT05 are set as acquisition character increase timings in response to an increase in the number of displayed character panel images for character acquisition from the first to the fifth time, respectively. Then, the interval AKL1 from the start timing AKT02 to the timing 90AKT01 which is the first acquisition character increase timing, the interval AKL2 from the timing 90AKT01 to the timing 90AKT02 which is the second acquisition character increase timing, and the third time from the timing 90AKT02. Interval AKL3 from timing 90AKT03 to timing 90AKT03, which is the timing of increasing acquired characters, interval AKL4, interval from timing 90AKT04 to timing 90AKT05, which is the timing of increasing acquired characters for the fourth time AKL5 Is set so that it is within the range of 1.5 seconds or less in 0.5 seconds or more. For example, the effect control CPU 101 may determine the acquisition character increase timing each time by extracting numerical data that becomes a random number for determining the acquisition character increase timing and referring to the acquisition character increase timing determination table. Alternatively, a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance for each number of acquired characters as a timing pattern in which the acquired character increase timing is combined, and the acquired character increase timing may be determined each time by selecting one of the timing patterns. By sequentially increasing the number of displayed character panel images, which are specific images, each time the acquisition character increase timing determined in this way is reached, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to monotonous display of specific images, resulting in a sense of discomfort. No proper display effect is possible.

In the acquisition effect, the timing at which the number of displayed character panel images increases is the same timing for increasing the number of acquired characters depending on whether the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 or not. On the other hand, in the acquisition production, the acquisition promotion notification is performed to encourage the player to launch a right-handed game ball toward the second start winning opening 14. In the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, when there is a second start prize in 90AKS08, the prize notification effect is executed under the control of 90AKS09. For example, an increase fanning effect display may be performed to encourage the display number of character panel images to increase. The increase fanning effect display is, for example, from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9 corresponding to the arrangement position where the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the right-handed path which is the second path. It suffices to display an effect image showing how the action is applied toward the panel preparation image. Alternatively, the increase fanning effect display may be any effect display such as a flash display for flashing the entire screen of the effect display device 9 or a blackout display for blacking out. By executing such a winning notification effect, it is possible to give the impression that the player is involved in the increase in the acquired characters, and to promote the game by launching the right-handed game ball.

The timing of increasing the acquired characters may be different depending on whether the player is firing the right-handed game ball or not. For example, in the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, it is determined whether or not the launch of the right-handed game ball is detected when the acquisition character increase timing is set at 90AKS06. At this time, if detected, the number of displayed character panel images is increased at the determined acquisition character increase timing. On the other hand, if it is not detected, the timing for increasing the number of displayed character panel images may be delayed by changing the determined acquisition character increase timing to a timing obtained by adding a predetermined time such as 1 second.

FIG. 17-21 is a flowchart showing a small symbol change setting process (89AKS03) in the acquisition effect process (AKS104). The small symbol change setting process is executed in 90AKS02 of the acquisition effect process shown in FIGS. 17-12 in response to the case where there is a hit notice. If there is a hit notice, either the final change of the special symbol or the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion becomes the hit variation, and the display result of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol. In the small symbol change setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit variation is the special state final variation (89AKS31). When the hit fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the special state, it is not necessary to change the final stop small symbol, so the process ends as it is.

When the hit fluctuation is not the final fluctuation in the special state but one of the fluctuation displays corresponding to the second reserved storage portion, the final stop small symbol is confirmed (89AKS32). For example, the effect control CPU 101 may confirm the final stop small symbol by reading the stored data of the final stop small symbol determined by 89AKS11 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9. Among the final stop small symbols confirmed at this time, the small symbol that is the middle symbol is changed to a special symbol indicating the letter V (89AKS33). In this way, when the final fluctuation of the special state is not a hit fluctuation but one of the fluctuation displays corresponding to the second reserved storage is a hit fluctuation, the middle symbol in the fixed small symbol corresponding to the current fluctuation display is special. By changing to a symbol, a special display result can be derived. In this case, the setting of the hit hold standby is performed (89AKS34). For example, the hit hold standby flag provided in the RAM 103 may be set. Then, in the finalized small symbol, it is determined whether or not the left symbol and the right symbol are a combination of specific symbols (89AKS35). If it is not a combination of specific symbols, the special display result configured by the change in 89AKS33 can be derived by ending the process. In the case of a combination of specific symbols, in the finalized small symbol, the left symbol or the right symbol is changed to a small symbol other than the specific symbol (89AKS36), and then the process is terminated. As a result, the fixed small symbol different from the special symbol constituting the special display result includes the small symbol different from the specific symbol.

FIG. 17-22 is a flowchart showing the expectation degree raising effect processing (AKS106) in the final variation effect processing (89AKS02). In the expectation increase effect process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the timing AKT03 can start the expectation increase effect (91AKS11). The expected degree raising effect shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 can be started to be executed at the timing AKT03. When the timing is AKT03, it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is 4, which is the upper limit value (91AKS12). At this time, if the number of second reserved memories is less than 4 and not 4, the expectation level raising effect is prohibited (91AKS13). For example, by canceling the setting of the expectation degree increase effect period, it may be set so that the expectation degree increase effect process is not executed in the subsequent final variation effect process. As a result, when the timing AKT03 at which the expectation level increase effect can be started is reached, the range in which the second reserved memory number does not reach the upper limit value of 4 is defined, and the expectation level increase effect that becomes the change effect is performed. There is a limit limit of not executing.

When the expectation level raising effect is not executed, the acquisition effect may be continuously executed. When the second start prize occurs during the execution of this acquisition effect, the number of character panel images displayed may be increased in the acquisition effect, or the acquisition effect may be ended and the execution of the expectation increase effect may be started. good. Alternatively, when the expectation level raising effect is not executed, the acquisition effect may end without continuing. In this case, an effect different from the acquired effect may be executed, or a standby state may be set until the execution of the advance notice effect is started.

Timing at which the expectation increase effect can be started When the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value of 4 when AKT03 is reached, the expectation increase effect which is a change effect can be executed. Control is done. For example, when the second reserved storage number is 4 in 91AKS12, the target notice number is set to 1 (91AKS14). The target advance notice number in the expectation increase effect processing is, for example, the advance notice number associated with the storage area of the final variation effect data in the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02, which is the target of the determination regarding the expectation increase effect. A number is specified. Even when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value of 4, the expectation degree raising effect may not be executed at a predetermined ratio. When the second reserved memory reaches the upper limit of 4, for example, the expectation level increase effect is executed at a high rate such as 90%, while the expectation level is low such as 10%. The up effect may not be executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the target notice number is a hit notice number (91AKS15). The winning notice number can be determined by 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12. Then, in the case of a hit notice number, it is determined to increase the hit notice expectation (91AKS16). The decision to increase the expectation of the hit notice is the decision of whether or not to change the display mode of the character panel image and the change when the notice effect related to the character panel image that is the specific image is the hit notice that suggests the hit. Includes the determination of the display mode after the change in the case of causing. On the other hand, if it is not a winning notice number, it is determined to increase the expectation of loss notice (91AKS17). The decision to increase the expectation of loss notice is the decision of whether to change the display mode of the character panel image and the change when the notice effect related to the character panel image that is the specific image is the loss notice that suggests loss. Includes the determination of the display mode after the change in the case of causing. The final variation effect data indicating the determination result by 91AKS16 or 91AKS17 may be stored and stored in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with the advance notice number to be the target advance notice number. After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the hit advance notice expectation increase or the loss advance notice expectation increase is no expectation increase that does not change the display mode of the character panel image (91AKS18).

When the result of determining the degree of expectation increases the degree of expectation that changes the display mode of the character panel image, the condition for increasing the degree of expectation is determined (92AKS01). The expectation increase condition is a condition to be satisfied in order to change the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation increase effect. For example, the expectation level increase condition can be selected from a plurality of types of conditions such as the occurrence of the second start prize, the end of the expectation level increase effect, the specific timing during the expectation level increase effect, or a combination of some or all of them. It suffices if it can be determined. The final variation effect data indicating the expected degree increase condition determined at this time may be stored and stored in the storage area of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with the advance notice number to be the target advance notice number. Then, it is determined whether or not the target notice number is the number of times the notice is executed (91AKS19). If it is not the number of times the notice is executed, the target notice number is incremented by 1 (91AKS20). After that, the process is returned to 91AKS15, and the increase in the expectation of the hit notice and the increase in the expectation of the loss notice are sequentially determined. When the number of times the advance notice is executed, control is performed to start the continuous promotion notification (91AKS21). For example, it is sufficient that the continuous promotion notification can be executed by displaying the effect image of the display mode corresponding to the continuous promotion notification at the notification display position on the screen of the effect display device 9. Along with the display of the effect image, the continuous promotion notification may be executed by voice output, lamp lighting, movement of a moving object, or a combination of a part or all of them.

If the timing AKT03 is not set in 91AKS11, it is determined whether or not there is a second start winning prize (91AKS22). For example, when the second start prize designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, it may be determined that the second start prize has been given. The second start winning prize designation command is for effect control when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state even when the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value in the start port switch passing process (S311). It suffices if it can be transmitted to the microcomputer 100. If there is a second start prize, it is determined whether or not the expectation level cannot be increased (91AKS23). For example, if the occurrence of the second start prize is not included in the expectation increase condition, or if the expectation increase has already been executed, it may be determined that the expectation increase is not possible. If it is not possible to increase the degree of expectation, control is performed to execute the fanning effect (91AKS24). For example, a fanning effect display may be performed to encourage the display mode of the character panel image to change. The fanning effect display is, for example, one of the characters from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9 corresponding to the arrangement position where the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the right-handed path which is the second path. It suffices to display an effect image showing how the action is applied toward the panel image. Alternatively, the fanning effect display may be any effect display such as a flash display for flashing the entire screen of the effect display device 9 or a blackout display for blacking out.

If there is no second start prize in 91AKS22, it is determined whether or not other conditions for increasing the degree of expectation are satisfied (91AKS25). When the expectation level can be increased by the 91AKS23 or when another expectation level increase condition is satisfied in the 91AKS25, control is performed to execute the expectation level increase notification (91AKS26). At this time, since the expectation degree increase condition is satisfied, for example, if the display mode of the character panel image corresponding to the notice number is changed according to the expectation degree increase setting indicated by the storage data of the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02. good. In addition, a change effect display may be performed to notify that the display mode of the character panel image has changed. The change effect display is the same as the increase effect display in the acquisition effect, the display of the first effect image added around the character panel image whose display mode has changed, and the second effect image different from the first effect image. May include the display of. The display mode of the second effect image is, for example, from the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9 corresponding to the arrangement position where the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the right-handed path which is the second path. It suffices as long as it is an effect image showing how the action is applied toward the changed character panel image. By displaying such an effect image, it is possible to give the player the impression that the display mode of the character panel image has changed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14. However, in reality, the display mode of the character panel image may be changed due to the establishment of the expectation level raising condition different from the occurrence of the second start winning. Therefore, in the expectation increase effect, regardless of whether the game ball enters or does not enter the second start winning opening 14, if the preset expectation increase condition is satisfied, the display mode of the character panel image that becomes a specific image is satisfied. It is only necessary to be able to change. On the other hand, in the expectation increase effect, even if the game ball enters or does not enter the second start winning opening 14, if the preset expectation increase condition is not satisfied, the character panel image becomes a specific image. Does not change the display mode of.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is the timing AKT04 to end the expectation raising effect (91AKS27). The expected degree raising effect shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 ends at the timing AKT04. If the timing is not AKT04, the process ends. When the timing is AKT04, control is performed to end the continuation promotion notification (91AKS28). In addition, control is performed to end the timer update display (91AKS29), and the process is terminated.

FIG. 17-23 shows a display example when the expectation level raising effect is executed. FIG. 17-23 (A) shows a display example 91AK01 when the expectation level raising effect is started. When the expectation increase effect is executed, five character panel images are displayed at five panel display positions 90AKA1 to 90AKA5 on the screen of the effect display device 9, and continuous promotion notification is displayed at the notification display position 91AKAB1. The image is displayed. The expectation increase effect can be executed when the second reserved storage number is the upper limit value of 4, and is restricted so as not to be executed when the second reserved storage number is less than 4. When the number of second reserved memories is 4, the number of character panel images displayed in the acquisition effect is 5 corresponding to the number of acquired characters of 5, and 5 character panel images are displayed. .. The continuation promotion notification image is an effect image for promoting the launch of the game ball aiming at the second start winning opening 14 continuously from the acquisition effect during the execution of the expectation degree increase effect. The continuous promotion notification image is displayed together with the production image of the right-handed promotion notification in the right-handed display area 9Z, so that the game ball is driven into the right-handed route which is the second route provided with the second start winning opening 14. You may promote right-handed hitting. In the display example 91AK01, the continuous promotion notification image including the character image indicating the message "Still aim!" Is displayed at the notification display position 91AKB1.

When the expectation increase condition includes the occurrence of the second start prize, the expectation increase condition is satisfied when the second start prize as shown in FIG. 17-23 (B) occurs. FIG. 17-23 (C) is a display example 91AK02 when the expectation increase condition is satisfied in the expectation increase effect. In the expectation increase effect shown in FIGS. 17-22, when the 91AKS22 has a second start prize and the expectation can be increased by the 91AKS23, the expectation increase is notified by the control of the 91AKS26. In the display example 91AK02, the display mode of the character panel image is changed by changing the display color of the panel frame partial image from white to gold in the fifth character panel image. At this time, the effect display at the time of change described with respect to 91AKS26 of the expectation degree raising effect processing may be performed. In this way, in the expectation increase effect, the player can give an impression that the player is involved in the change of the character panel image by displaying the effect image, and the game can be promoted by launching the right-handed game ball.

FIG. 17-24 (A) shows a determination example 91AKD11 for increasing the expectation of a hit notice. In the expectation increase effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-22, the advance notice expectation increase is determined at 91AKS16. In the determination example 91AKD11, the presence / absence of an increase in the degree of expectation and the display color which is the display mode after the change are determined by the determination rate according to the character indicated by the character panel image of the target notice number. For example, when the character shown in the character panel image is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, it is determined with a determination rate of 40% without an increase in expectation, and is expected to change to red with a determination rate of 50%. It is decided to increase the degree, and it is decided to increase the expectation to change to gold with a determination rate of 10%. When the character shown in the character panel image is any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the character is determined with a determination rate of 20% without increasing the expectation, and is red with a determination rate of 60%. It is decided to increase the expectation to change to gold, and it is decided to increase the expectation to change to gold with a decision rate of 20%.

As described above, in the determination example 91AKD11, the character shown in the character panel image is a hit depending on whether the character is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 or the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5. The decision rate for increasing the advancement expectation is different. Specifically, in the case of any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the display color is changed at a higher rate than in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, and the hit expectation degree. Up. Therefore, the rate of changing the display mode of the character panel image differs depending on the type of character in the character panel image. As a result, it is possible to produce an appropriate display effect that raises the attention of the player by making the expectation that the display mode of the character panel image changes different.

FIG. 17-24 (B) shows a determination example 91AKD12 for increasing the expectation of loss notice. In the expectation increase effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-22, the loss notice expectation increase is determined at 91AKS17. In the determination example 91AKD12, the presence / absence of an increase in the degree of expectation and the display color which is the display mode after the change are determined by the determination rate according to the character indicated by the character panel image of the target notice number. For example, when the character shown in the character panel image is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, it is determined with a determination rate of 85% without an increase in expectation, and is expected to change to red with a determination rate of 13%. It is decided to increase the degree, and it is decided to increase the expectation to change to gold with a decision rate of 2%. When the character shown in the character panel image is any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, it is determined with a determination rate of 90% without an increase in expectation, and is red with a determination rate of 9%. It is decided to increase the expectation to change to gold, and it is decided to increase the expectation to change to gold with a determination rate of 1%.

As described above, in the determination example 91AKD12, the character shown in the character panel image is lost depending on whether the character is the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2 or the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5. The decision rate for increasing the advancement expectation is different. Specifically, in the case of any of the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5, the degree of expectation does not increase at a higher rate than in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2. Therefore, the rate of changing the display mode of the character panel image differs depending on the type of character in the character panel image. Further, in the case of the first character AKC1 or the second character AKC2, the display mode is more likely to change due to the increase in the loss notice expectation than the increase in the hit notice expectation, whereas the display mode is more likely to change due to the increase in the loss notice expectation, whereas the third character AKC3 to the fifth character AKC5 In the case of any of the above, the display mode is more likely to change due to the increase in the expectation of the hit notice than the increase in the expectation of the loss notice. As a result, it is possible to produce an appropriate display effect in which the expected degree of hit when the display mode of the character panel image is changed is different depending on the character shown in the character panel image, and the expectation of the player is different.

FIG. 17-25 shows a setting example 92AK01 of the expectation degree increase condition. In the expectation increase effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-22, when there is an expectation increase in 91AKS18, the expectation increase condition is determined by 92AKS01. In the setting example 92AK01, as the expectation increase condition for changing the display mode of the character panel image in the expectation increase effect, it is possible to select and determine from a plurality of types of expectation increase conditions such as the expectation increase conditions 92AKC01 to 92AKC03. ing. The conditions for increasing the degree of expectation may be set in part or all of different conditions for a plurality of conditions such as the second start winning, the forced up timing during the production, and the production end timing. The second start prize is a condition that can be established when the second start prize occurs. The forced up timing during the production is a condition that can be satisfied when the forced up timing provided during the execution of the expectation level up production is reached. The effect end timing is a condition that can be satisfied when the expectation level increase effect ends.

The conditions for increasing the degree of expectation 92AKC01 to 92AKC03 are all set so that they can be satisfied when the second start winning prize occurs. Therefore, regardless of which of the conditions for increasing the expectation is determined, the display mode of the character panel image, which is a specific image, can be changed if the second start winning is generated. On the other hand, the expectation level up condition 92AKC01 includes a combination of conditions that there is a forced up timing during the production and there is no production end timing. The expectation level up condition 92AKC02 includes a combination of conditions that there is no forced up timing during the production and there is a production end timing. The expectation level up condition 92AKC03 includes a combination of conditions that there is no forced up timing during the production and no production end timing.

As described above, in the setting example 92AK01, when the expectation degree increase condition 92AKC01 is determined, the display mode of the character panel image can be changed by setting the forced timing during the production in the expectation degree increase effect. Further, when the expectation degree increase condition 92AKC02 is determined, the display mode of the character panel image is changed when the game ball passes through the second start prize opening 14 in the expectation increase effect, and the second start winning opening is changed. When the game ball does not pass through 14, the display mode of the character panel image can be changed when the expectation level raising effect ends. When the expectation increase condition 92AKC03 is determined, the display mode of the character panel image can be changed when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening 14 in the expectation increase effect, but the second start When the game ball does not pass through the winning opening 14, the display mode of the character panel image is not changed, and the expectation level is not increased in the expectation level increase effect.

Instead of the expectation increase condition 92AKC01, or together with the expectation increase condition 92AKC01, a case may be provided in which the occurrence of the second start prize is not included in the condition. In this case, even when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening 14 in the expectation increase production, the display mode of the character panel image is not changed at this point, and the character panel image is at the time of the forced up timing during the production. Will change the display mode of. In this way, when the condition of the forced up timing during the production is included, the display mode of the character panel image is displayed regardless of whether the game ball passes or does not pass through the second start winning opening 14 in the expectation increase production. Can be changed, and the change timing may be arbitrarily set.

In the expectation increase effect, the character shown in the character partial image may be changed. In 91AKS16 and 91AKS17 of the expectation increase effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-22, the character shown in the displayed character panel image is specified according to the target notice number, and the character is changed based on the specific result. The determination of whether or not the character may or may not be performed and the determination of the character after the change in the case of changing the character may be performed. At this time, the changed character may be determined so that the character has a higher hit expectation and the advantage of the special state than the character shown in the displayed character panel image. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation when the display mode of the character panel image is changed, and to produce an appropriate display effect that raises the attention of the player.

FIG. 17-26 is a flowchart showing a notice effect process (AKS108) in the final variation effect process (89AKS02). In the advance notice effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the timing AKT11 can start the first advance notice effect (AKS301). The advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 17-5 and 17-6 can be started for the first execution at the timing AKT11. If the timing is AKT11, 1 is set in the target notice number (AKS302). As the target advance notice number in the advance notice effect processing, for example, in the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02, among the advance notice numbers associated with the storage area of the final variation effect data, the advance notice number of the advance notice effect to be executed is designated. NS.

Next, the advance notice effect control pattern is selected (AKS303). The advance notice effect control pattern is configured to include control data for controlling the execution of the advance notice effect, and a plurality of patterns according to the effect mode of the advance notice effect may be prepared in advance. After that, control is performed to start the advance notice effect (AKS304). As a result, it becomes possible to start the execution of the advance notice effect related to the character panel image which is the specific image displayed in the acquisition effect and the expectation increase effect.

If the timing is not AKT11 in AKS301, it is determined whether or not to end the advance notice production this time (AKS305). For example, based on the control data read from the advance notice effect control pattern, when the end of the present advance notice effect is specified, it may be determined that the present advance notice effect is ended. If this notice production is not finished, the process is finished. On the other hand, when the notice production of this time is finished, the target notice number is increased by 1 (AKS306). After that, it is determined whether or not there is a notice next time (AKS307). For example, in the final variation effect data storage unit AKM02, if the final variation effect data for executing the advance announcement effect is stored in the storage area associated with the advance notice number that is the target advance notice number, it is determined that there is a next advance notice. However, if such final fluctuation effect data is not stored, it may be determined that there is no notice next time. If there is a notice next time, the process is returned to AKS303 and the execution of the notice effect according to the target notice number is started.

If there is no next notice in AKS307, control is performed to end the notice effect (AKS308). At this time, when only the loss notice that suggests the loss is executed as the notice effect, the control to start the execution of the loss corresponding effect among the display result corresponding effects may be performed. On the other hand, when the hit notice that is a hit suggestion is executed as the notice effect, the control to start the execution of the hit corresponding effect among the display result corresponding effects may be performed. It suffices that the execution of the loss-corresponding effect enables specific notification for notifying that the player is not controlled in an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state. It suffices that the execution of the hit-corresponding effect enables specific notification for notifying that the player is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state.

After AKS308, control is performed to stop and display the small symbol (89AKS71). For example, when the final change in the special state is lost, the fixed small symbol determined as the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. Further, when the final fluctuation of the special state is a hit, the temporarily stopped small symbol using the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. The temporarily stopped small symbol using the special symbol is determined by 89AKS20 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIGS. 17-9. In this way, when the variable display that is the final variation of the special state is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state, the special display result is configured during the variable display in the variable display. Temporary stop using a special symbol Stops a small symbol temporarily. In this case, after the advance notice effect is completed, a specific notification for notifying that the hit-corresponding effect included in the display result-corresponding effect is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state is provided. After the execution, as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the small symbol, the fixed small symbol of the winning combination may be stopped and displayed. By temporarily stopping such a temporary stop small symbol and then stopping and displaying the fixed small symbol of the winning combination, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which variation display is used to control the advantageous state, and the final variation. It is possible to raise the player's attention to various effects included in the effect, and to perform an appropriate display effect to improve the interest of the game.

In 89AKS20 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-9, a temporary stop small symbol that does not use a special symbol may be determined. In this case, under the control of 89AKS71, a temporary stop small symbol that does not use a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the end of the advance notice effect. In this case, after the advance notice effect is completed, the fixed small symbol of the winning combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the small symbol in response to the end of the variable display corresponding to the final fluctuation of the special state. Just do it. Temporary stop without using a special symbol By temporarily stopping the small symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to recognize at an early stage that the player is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state, which is advantageous. Appropriate display effects that maintain a sense of expectation for the state become possible.

When the variation display corresponding to the special state final variation and the second reserved storage is all lost, the loss notice that suggests the loss is executed in all the advance notice effects. In this case, under the control of 89AKS71, the fixed small symbol of the loss combination determined as the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the notice effect to be executed last. In this way, when the loss notice that suggests the loss is executed in all the notice effects, the player is given the impression that the variable display is highly linked with the notice effect by stopping and displaying the fixed small symbol of the loss combination. By giving, it becomes possible to perform an appropriate display effect that raises the player's interest in the notice effect and the variable display.

In 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, the hit notice number is determined according to the fluctuation display which is the hit fluctuation. As a result, the final fluctuation of the special state becomes a hit fluctuation and is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, or one of the fluctuation displays of the second reserved memory becomes a hit fluctuation and becomes a big hit gaming state or a small hit. It is possible to suggest that it is controlled to an advantageous state by executing a hit notice that is a hit suggestion by any one of a plurality of advance notice effects depending on the case where it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a game state.

In 90AKS03 of the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, the number of times of notice execution at the time of loss is determined. As a result, when the final fluctuation of the special state is not controlled by the advantageous state such as the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state instead of the hit fluctuation, and the fluctuation display of the second reserved storage is not the hit fluctuation and the specific reserved information is not stored. By executing the loss notice that suggests the loss by all of the multiple notice effects, it becomes possible to suggest that the state is not controlled in an advantageous state.

FIG. 17-27 shows a configuration example AKY01 of the advance notice effect control pattern. In the advance notice effect processing shown in FIGS. 17-26, the advance notice effect control pattern to be used corresponding to the present advance notice effect is selected from the advance notice effect control patterns prepared by AKS303 in a plurality of patterns. In the configuration example AKY01, the notice number indicated by the target notice number, the character indicated by the final change effect data stored in the final change effect data storage unit AKM02 in association with this notice number, and the content of the notice can be selected. A plurality of patterns are prepared in advance as a notice effect control pattern. For example, one of the notice effect control patterns CPA1-1 to CPA1-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 1 and the notice content is a hit suggestion. The notice effect control pattern CPA2-1 to CPA2-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 2 and the notice content is a hit suggestion. The notice effect control pattern CPA3-1 to CPA3-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 3 and the notice content is a hit suggestion. The notice effect control pattern CPA4-1 to CPA4-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 4 and the notice content is a hit suggestion. The notice effect control pattern CPA5-1 to CPA5-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 5 and the notice content is a hit suggestion. Further, the notice effect control patterns CPB1-1 to CPB1-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 1 and the notice content is a suggestion of loss. The notice effect control pattern CPB2-1 to CPB2-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 2 and the notice content suggests a loss. The notice effect control pattern CPB3-1 to CPB3-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 3 and the notice content suggests a loss. The notice effect control pattern CPB4-1 to CPB4-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 4 and the notice content suggests a loss. The notice effect control pattern CPB5-1 to CPB5-5 can be selected according to the character shown in the character panel image when the notice number is 5 and the notice content suggests a loss.

In this way, in the configuration example AKY01, the advance notice number corresponding to the number of times the advance notice effect is executed, the character shown in the character panel image that is the ally character in the advance notice effect, and whether the advance notice effect is a hit suggestion or a loss suggestion. By selecting the advance notice effect control pattern according to the above, it becomes possible to execute the advance notice effect having a different effect mode. In addition, by selecting the advance notice effect control pattern according to the character shown in the character panel image and controlling the execution of the advance notice effect, the character shown in the character panel image becomes a ally character in the battle effect in the advance notice effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a preview effect of an effect mode related to the character panel image that is a specific image. Note that the advance notice effect control pattern in the configuration example AKY01 is not limited, and an arbitrary advance notice effect control pattern may be used so that the advance notice effect related to the character panel image that is a specific image can be executed.

When the execution of the advance notice effect is started, if the second reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value 4, the advance notice at the time of advance notice may be executed. The advance notice at the time of advance notice may be a notification mode common to the acquisition promotion notification or the continuation promotion notification, or may be a notification mode different from these. When the timing AKT11 is set in the AKS301 of the advance notice effect process shown in FIGS. 17-26, it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is the upper limit value. If it is not the upper limit value, it is sufficient that the advance notice at the time of advance notice can be executed by displaying the effect image, outputting the sound, lighting the lamp, operating the moving object, or a combination of a part or all of them.

17-28 and 17-29 show a display example after the expectation level raising effect is completed. When the expectation level raising effect is completed, the display of the effect image showing the enemy character is started as shown in the display example AK101 shown in FIG. 17-28 (A). In the display example AK101, the character panel image displayed by the acquisition effect or the expectation level increase effect is reduced to a predetermined position on the screen such as the lower right on the screen of the effect display device 9 and displayed. Next, in the display example AK102 shown in FIG. 17-28 (B), the first advance notice effect is started corresponding to the timing AKT11. At this time, among the plurality of character panel images, the display of the character panel image related to this notice effect, such as the character panel image displayed on the leftmost side, is deleted. Along with this, the battle production of the advance notice production in which the character shown in the erased character panel image becomes a ally character starts to proceed. When the notice effect is executed, when the notice effect is executed, the display of the character panel image is erased each time the action of the player who presses the push button 120 is detected, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed. The battle production may proceed. By these display controls, the player can recognize that the advance notice effect related to the character panel image is executed. Then, in the display example AK103 shown in FIG. 17-28 (C), the loss notice that suggests the loss is executed by displaying the scene in which the ally character is defeated.

After that, even in the second to fourth notice effects, the battle effect of the notice effects in which the characters shown in the sequentially erased character panel images become ally characters progresses. In the series of display examples shown in FIGS. 17-28, in each of the first to fourth notice effects, the scene in which the ally character is defeated is displayed, so that the loss notice that suggests the loss is executed. Subsequently, in the display example AK104 shown in FIG. 17-28 (D), the fifth advance notice effect is started corresponding to the timing AKT15. At this time as well, the battle effect of the advance notice effect in which the character indicated by the erased character panel image becomes a ally character starts to proceed. Then, in the display example AK105 shown in FIG. 17-28 (E), the winning notice of the winning suggestion is executed by displaying the scene in which the ally character wins. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final stop small symbol changed in 89AKS33 or 89AKS36 of the small symbol change setting process shown in FIG. 17-21 is stopped and displayed.

Following the execution of the hit notice, in the display example AK106 shown in FIG. 17-28 (F), the hit correspondence effect is started. In the hit correspondence display, even if the final fluctuation of the special state ends, the reproduction display of the moving image or the animation display of the still image in the display of the background image is continuously executed. For example, in the display example AK107 shown in FIGS. 17-28 (G), the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9K corresponds to the variable display in which the hold number in the second hold storage at the end of the special state is 1. It will be started. At this time as well, the reproduction display of the moving image in the hit correspondence display and the like are continuously executed. In the display example AK108 shown in FIG. 17-28 (H), the final stop small symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final stop small symbol changed in 89AKS16 or 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIGS. 17-9 is stopped and displayed.

In the display example AK109 shown in FIG. 17-28 (I), the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9K is started corresponding to the variable display in which the hold number in the second hold storage at the end of the special state is 2. NS. At this time as well, the reproduction display of the moving image in the hit correspondence display and the like are continuously executed. In the display example AK110 shown in FIG. 17-28 (J), the final stop small symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final stop small symbol changed in 89AKS16 or 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIGS. 17-9 is stopped and displayed.

In the display example AK111 shown in FIG. 17-29 (A), the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9K is started corresponding to the variable display of the hold number 3 in the second hold storage at the end of the special state. NS. At this time as well, the reproduction display of the moving image in the hit correspondence display and the like are continuously executed. In the display example AK112 shown in FIG. 17-29 (B), the final stop small symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. At this time, in the small symbol display area 9K, the final stop small symbol changed in 89AKS16 or 89AKS18 of the small symbol determination process shown in FIGS. 17-9 is stopped and displayed. In the display example AK113 shown in FIG. 17-29 (C), the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9K is started corresponding to the variable display of the hold number 4 in the second hold storage at the end of the special state. NS. At this time, the variable display result is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 corresponding to the "hit". Further, in 89AKS53 of the effect symbol variation start setting process shown in FIG. 17-7, it is determined that the variation pattern is not PD1-1, and in 89AKS54, it is determined that the effect symbol is hidden, so that 89AKS55 By setting, the display of the effect symbol returns to the normal display state. When the final change in the special state is started, the display of the effect symbol is hidden by the setting of 89AKS52, and the effect symbol is not displayed. As a result, in the display example AK113, the effect symbol is variably displayed. After that, in the display example AK114 shown in FIGS. 17-29 (D), the final stop symbol, the final stop symbol, and the final stop symbol are stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. In this way, in the variable display based on the specific hold information, it is possible to notify that the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state in a mode different from the specific notification by the hit correspondence effect such as the display result of the effect symbol. Is. It should be noted that the display result is not limited to the display result of the effect symbol, and the display of the effect image different from the effect image in the effect symbol or the effect corresponding to the hit, the sound output, the lamp lighting, the movement of the moving object, or a combination of some or all of them. , It suffices to be able to notify that the control is performed in an advantageous state in an arbitrary mode different from the advance notice effect and the hit response effect.

When the advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times, in the small symbol display area 9K, even if the small symbol is stopped and displayed so that the variable display mode becomes the reach mode each time the advance notice effect is executed. good. For example, in the display examples AK101 and AK102, the small symbols having the same symbol number as the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped in the small symbol display area 9K. In the display example AK104, the small symbols having the same symbol number as the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped in the small symbol display area 9K. In the display example AK103, the once stopped small symbol may be changed again in response to the end of the notice effect. In this way, by giving the player an impression of a reach mode each time the advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the advance notice effect and to perform an appropriate display effect to improve the game interest. ..

In the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 17-7, when the special state final variation is performed in 89AKS51, the effect symbol is not displayed due to the setting of 89AKS52 and is in a non-display state. During the execution of the variable display, which is the final variation of the special state, the acquisition effect included in the final variation effect, the expectation level increase effect, one or more notice effects, the display result corresponding effect such as the loss corresponding effect or the hit corresponding effect, etc. , Various productions are performed. In this case, by making the effect symbol non-displayable, the player can easily recognize various effects included in the final variation effect, and an appropriate display effect that raises the player's attention to the effect can be achieved. It will be possible. After that, the non-display state of the effect symbol continues until it is determined by 89AKS53 of the effect symbol variation start process that the effect pattern is not the variation pattern PD1-1. Therefore, if the variation display is lost based on the hold information different from the specific hold information after the final change effect including the advance notice effect which is a hit suggestion is executed, the effect symbol is hidden. Variable display of small symbols is performed. Then, when the variation display is a hit based on the specific hold information, it is determined to be one of the variation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 different from the variation pattern PD1-1, so that the effect symbol is set to the normal display state. It is restored and the small symbol is displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the variable display corresponding to the "hit" of the variable display result can be easily recognized by the player, so that it can be reliably notified that the variable display result is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state. Appropriate display effect is possible.

In the small symbol change setting process shown in FIG. 17-21, the medium symbol may not be changed to the special symbol by 89AKS33. In this case, even if the specific hold information is included in the hold information that becomes the second hold memory at the end of the special state, the loss combination that does not use the special symbol is confirmed in the variable display corresponding to the final change of the special state. The symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, in the variable display based on the specific hold information, it is possible to notify that the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state in a mode different from the specific notification by the hit correspondence effect such as the display result of the effect symbol. Is. In this way, even when the specific hold information is stored, it is possible to control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state by deriving a display result that does not use a special symbol in the final change of the special state. It is possible to prevent the player from being recognized at an early stage and to produce an appropriate display effect that maintains the expectation for the advantageous state.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

Various effects included in the final variation effect are different from the special state final variation when they can be executed in response to the special state final variation or when they can be executed in response to the special state final variation. It may be feasible in response to the display. For example, in the normal state, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened in a relatively long opening change period, and the second starting winning may be likely to occur. You may. When the second reserved storage number reaches a specific value due to the occurrence of such a second start winning prize, it becomes possible to execute the same effects as the various effects included in the final variation effect along with the execution of the special variation display. You may. Not only the hold information that becomes the second hold storage, but also the hold information that becomes the first hold storage may be used to enable the same effects as the various effects included in the final variation effect.

In addition, in the normal state, a predetermined reach effect is executed as a specific reach effect, the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, and when a big hit occurs, the temporary stop small symbol using the special small symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be displayed and then changed again to derive a definite small symbol of the winning combination. For example, in the small symbol determination process 89AKS19 shown in FIG. 17-9, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a specific reach effect that can be selected in the normal state other than the variation pattern PC3-3, the process is set to 89AKS20. It suffices to proceed and determine a temporary stop small symbol using a special symbol. By temporarily stopping the small symbol that is the special symbol in this way, the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol, and it may be possible to suggest that a jackpot occurs.

In the small symbol determination process shown in FIG. 17-19, when the variation pattern PC3-3 is determined in 89AKS19, the temporary stop small symbol using the special symbol is determined by 89AKS20 regardless of the hit type. .. On the other hand, when the hit type is a specific type, the small symbol using the special symbol may not be temporarily stopped and displayed. For example, when the hit type is the second special symbol big hit, the temporary stop small symbol is not determined by 89AKS20, the small symbol using the special symbol is not temporarily stopped, and the fixed small symbol of the hit combination is displayed. It may be derived. Whether or not to temporarily stop and display a small symbol using a special symbol depending on whether the hit type is the second special figure big hit, the case where the fluctuation pattern is PC3-3 or the case where the hit type is other than the fluctuation pattern PC3-3. May be different. In addition, depending on whether or not a combination of hit types and fluctuation patterns, or whether or not conditions different from the combination of hit types and fluctuation patterns are satisfied, whether or not to temporarily stop and display a small symbol using a special symbol is different. May be good.

In 90AKS01 of the acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 17-12, even if there is a fluctuation display that becomes a hit variation, even if the advance notice effect of the hit notice that is a hit suggestion is not executed, it may be determined without the hit notice. good. In this case, it may be suggested or notified that a big hit or a small hit will occur by executing the revival effect after the advance notice effect of the loss notice that is a loss suggestion is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured such that the winning probability and the ball output rate change according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability and the payout rate may be changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit. Become. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the winning probability of a big hit or a small hit changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of a big hit or a small hit is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state may change according to the set value. The winning probability of a small hit is constant regardless of the set value, whereas the winning probability of a big hit may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 31 side to the effect control board 80 side.

While the variable display is being executed, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio. For example, the effect symbol change start process of the effect control process process includes the stop symbol determination process. The stop symbol determination process may be any process that can determine the combination of the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the effect symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the effect symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the setting suggestion effect may be determined to be executable at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of any of the reach symbols. The reach symbol is the same effect symbol in which the left symbol and the right symbol match and are displayed as a stop among the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss and the final stop symbol at the time of big hit.

In the stop symbol determination process, when the determined reach symbol is an effect symbol corresponding to the number 7, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined. The setting suggestion effect can be determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution decision table prepared in advance based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. good. The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the symbol display color is not changed. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, it is sufficient that the symbol display color can be changed at a predetermined ratio. In this way, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is set as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is an effect symbol corresponding to the number 7. Is changed or not. Depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine, whether or not the symbol display color is changed to a specific color differs as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is an effect symbol corresponding to the number 7. May be good.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the effect symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the effect pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the production mode by an arbitrary production device such as display of a background image, an outer frame image or any other production image, audio output, lamp lighting, movement of a moving object, and a combination of a part or all of these is changed. You may. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions.

In addition to the effect that the display color of the reach pattern can be changed, the setting suggestion effect suggests the degree of hit expectation by an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and also relates to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may be able to make suggestions. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion about the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state and the small hit gaming state is continuously performed, and the jackpot gaming state and It may include a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the small hit game state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is given. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state or the small hit gaming state is continued. It may include the case of performing and suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the suggestion of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the enjoyment of pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit, the hit start effect (fanfare effect) or the hit medium effect (small hit medium effect, the effect corresponding to the first round or the second round, etc.) is executed. Along with this, suggestions regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

Big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state in place of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state or small hit gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state or small hit gaming state. It may also make suggestions regarding control of a state that is advantageous to a different player. For example, it may suggest a special state that is controlled after the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

The various restrictions may be any range or limitation as long as they do not deviate from the achievement purpose, the problem to be solved, or other purposes of the present invention. The range of the limitation may be a condition that makes the presence / absence, the ratio, and other quantities different for the execution of processing, control, and operation, and the limit of the limitation is the presence / absence, ratio, and other quantity for the execution of processing, control, and operation. The content may be different (for example, when stopping, reducing, reducing, etc.).

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature 89AK)
A gaming machine that can variably display identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold information, and whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state. The specific notification executing means includes a specific notification executing means capable of executing the specific notification for notifying the identification information and a reduced variable display means capable of executing a variable display of the reduced identification information in a mode reduced from the identification information, and the specific notification executing means is specified. In the variable display, the specific variable display and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the specific variable display is executed can be executed and the specific notification can be executed and specified. To notify that the specific variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state when the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is not controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display and is controlled to the advantageous state is not stored in the hold storage means. In the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means after the specific notification is executed and the specific variable display is completed, a predetermined display result can be derived as the display result of the reduced identification information, and the predetermined display result can be derived based on the specific variable display. When the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled in the advantageous state, the specific notification for notifying that the specific hold information is controlled in the advantageous state is executed in the specific variable display, and after the specific variable display is completed. In the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the hold storage means, as the display result of the reduced identification information, a part of the reduced identification information constituting the predetermined display result and the reduction constituting the predetermined display result. It is possible to derive a special display result composed of special identification information that is not included in the identification information, and it is possible to notify that the variable display based on the specific hold information is controlled to an advantageous state in a mode different from the specific notification. The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, and when controlled to the second advantageous state, the display result of the identification information. As a result, the specific display result composed of only the specific identification information is derived, and the reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result includes the predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information. Here, the identification information may be, for example, an effect symbol or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The hold storage means may be, for example, a second hold storage buffer. The specific notification may be, for example, a notice effect, a display result corresponding effect, or the like. The specific notification execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect process of step AKS 108 and the display result corresponding effect process of step AKS 110. The reduced identification information may be, for example, a small symbol. The reduced variable display means may be, for example, a small symbol display area 9K of the effect display device 9. The predetermined display result may be, for example, the final stop symbol of the loss combination. The special display result may be, for example, a final stop symbol using a special symbol indicating the letter V. The first advantageous state may be, for example, the case of the first special figure jackpot C. The second advantageous state may be, for example, any of the first special figure jackpot A, the first special figure jackpot B, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpot via the small hit X to Z. The specific identification information may be, for example, a red 7 effect symbol and a small symbol, a gold 7 effect symbol and a small symbol, or the like.
With such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

When the specific variable display is controlled to an advantageous state, the special display result is temporarily stopped in the specific variable display, and the specific display result is executed after executing the specific notification for notifying that the specific variable display is controlled. May be derivable. For example, it may be the case where steps 89AKS19 and 89AKS20 are executed.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

The special display result may be derived in a different mode depending on whether it is derived in the specific variable display or in the variable display after the specific variable display is completed. For example, when determining the final stop symbol in step AKS011, the variation pattern PC1-3 determines the reach loss combination, the variation pattern PD1-1 determines the non-reach combination, and then the final stop in step 89AKS11. It may be the case where steps 89AKS16 to 89AKS18 are executed after the small symbol is determined, the case where steps 89AKS32 to 89AKS35 are executed, and the like.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

It is possible to control a start winning means that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the game medium can easily pass through the starting area than the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is more likely to change to the second state. The special state control means and the special state end means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state are provided. When the specific hold information is not stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of, the predetermined display result of the normal mode different from the reach mode is derived in the final variable display, and the hold storage is performed. In the variable display based on the hold information stored in the means, when a predetermined display result is derived as the display result of the reduced identification information and controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the final round, in the variable display of the final round. A specific result is derived, and when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the final variable display, it is notified that the specific hold information is controlled to the advantageous state in the final variable display. In the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the hold storage means, the special display result is derived as the display result of the reduced identification information, and the variable display based on the specific hold information is executed. The specific display result may be derived in. Here, the first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, a variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state termination means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The display result of the normal mode different from the reach mode may be derived, for example, when the final stop symbol is determined in step AKS011 and the variation pattern PC1-3 is also determined to be a non-reach combination. Derivation of the display result of a specific mode in the final variable display is, for example, when the final stop symbol is determined in step AKS011 and the jackpot combination is determined in correspondence with the variation pattern PC3-3. good.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

When the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display, the hold storage is performed after executing the specific effect suggesting that the specific hold information is controlled to the advantageous state in the specific variable display. The identification information is reduced as a non-display state in the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the means, and the identification information is reduced as the normal display state in the variable display based on the specific hold information. The identification information may be variablely displayed. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, a final variation effect. The identification information may be hidden, for example, when step 89AKS52 is executed. The identification information may be set to the normal display state, for example, when step 89AKS55 is executed.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

The variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the hold storage means is a variable display from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result, rather than the specific variable display when the advantageous state is not controlled. The time may be short. Here, the short variable display time may mean, for example, that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PD1-1 is 500 ms.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

When a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in the specific variable display is provided, the specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of specific effects in succession, and the specific effect is controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific variable display. Alternatively, when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it can be suggested that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state by any of a plurality of specific effects, and the specific hold information is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display. It is possible to suggest that the specific hold information is not controlled to the advantageous state by all of the multiple specific effects when the specific hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, and is controlled to the advantageous state by all of the multiple specific effects. When it is suggested that this is not done, a predetermined display result may be derived in response to the final specific effect. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, a notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect process of step AKS108. When it is possible to suggest that the control is performed in an advantageous state, for example, it may be a case where a notice effect is executed, which is a hit notice in which the notice content is a hit. When it is possible to suggest that the control is not performed in an advantageous state, for example, it may be a case where a notice effect is executed, which is a loss notice in which the notice content is a loss. Derivation of a predetermined display result in response to the final specific effect may be, for example, stopping and displaying a small symbol by executing step 89AKS71.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

The special identification information may not be included in the identification information that can be displayed while the variable display is being executed. For example, the V symbol having the symbol number "10" may be used as a suggestion at the time of special end.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

When the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, after the predetermined display result is derived as the display result of the reduced identification information in the specific variable display, the variable display based on the specific hold information is controlled in an advantageous state. May be able to be notified in a mode different from the specific notification. For example, it may be a case where the small symbol change setting process of step 89AKS03 is not executed.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature 90AK)
A game machine that can perform variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold information. It is possible to control a start winning means that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which the game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is more likely to change to the second state. A special state control means, a special state end means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state. The effect executing means is related to a pre-effect executing means capable of executing a pre-effect that displays a specific image of a display number related to the number of stored information on hold in the hold storage means, and a specific image displayed in the pre-effect. The specific effect executing means includes the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect, and the specific effect executing means holds the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the final variable display. When it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is not controlled up to the number of times corresponding to the number of display of the specific image, and the specific effect is controlled based on the variable display of the final time. When the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the specific hold information is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images. In the final variable display, when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, the number of variable displays executed before the variable display based on the specific hold information is the first and the second. In the case of, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is the same, and it is controlled to an advantageous state by the specific effect related to any of the specific images displayed in the pre-effect. The degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether or not is suggested. Here, the starting region may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, and the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The hold storage means may be, for example, a second hold storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, a variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state termination means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect process of step 89AKS02. The pre-production may be, for example, an acquisition production. The pre-effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS 104. The specific effect may be, for example, a notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect process of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the notice content is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the content of the notice is a hit. The variable display time may be common, for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 may be 140000 ms. The difference in the degree of advantage for the player may be, for example, when the winning notice character is determined by the determination example 90AKD11.
According to such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 91AK)
A game machine that can perform variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold information. It is possible to control a start winning means that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which the game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is more likely to change to the second state. A special state control means, a special state end means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state. The effect executing means is related to a pre-effect executing means capable of executing a pre-effect that displays a specific image of a display number related to the number of stored information on hold in the hold storage means, and a specific image displayed in the pre-effect. The specific effect executing means includes the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect, and the specific effect executing means holds the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the final variable display. When it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is not controlled up to the number of times corresponding to the number of display of the specific image, and the specific effect is controlled based on the variable display of the final time. When the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the specific hold information is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images. In the final variable display, when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, the number of variable displays executed before the variable display based on the specific hold information is the first and the second. In the case of, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is the same, and the pre-effect execution means prompts the launch of the game medium toward the start area in the final variable display. After the promotion effect is executed, the start area is set when the advance effect can be executed and the execution of the pre-effect is started in a state where the hold information is stored up to the maximum number that can be stored in the hold storage means. Regardless of whether the game medium passes or does not pass, it is possible to execute a pre-effect that displays the same number of specific images as the maximum number, and the pre-effect can be executed in a state where the hold information is not stored up to the maximum number. At the time of starting, regardless of whether the game medium passes through the starting area or not, a pre-effect of displaying a specific image of a display number according to the number of stored information on hold is provided. It is feasible, the special effect can be executed after the specific image is displayed in the pre-effect, and the special effect is not executed when the hold information is not stored up to the maximum number. Here, the starting region may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, and the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The hold storage means may be, for example, a second hold storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, a variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state termination means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect process of step 89AKS02. The pre-production may be, for example, an acquisition production. The pre-effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS 104. The specific effect may be, for example, a notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect process of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the notice content is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the content of the notice is a hit. The variable display time may be common, for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 may be 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed, for example, when the acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. The pre-effect of displaying a specific image having the same number of display numbers as the upper limit of the hold information that can be stored is executed by, for example, determining the number of acquired items to 5 if the second hold storage number is 4 according to the determination example 91AKD01. It may be a production. For the pre-effect of displaying a specific image of the display number according to the stored number of the reserved information, for example, if the second reserved stored number is less than 4, the number of acquired items equal to or larger than the second reserved stored number is determined by the determination example 91AKD01. It may be an acquisition effect to be executed. The special effect may be, for example, an effect of increasing expectations. The reason why the special effect is not executed may be, for example, when the effect of increasing the expectation level is prohibited by steps 91AKS12 and 91AKS13.
According to such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 92AK)
A game machine that can perform variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold information. It is possible to control a start winning means that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is more likely to change to the second state. A special state control means, a special state end means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state. The effect executing means is related to a pre-effect executing means capable of executing a pre-effect that displays a specific image of a display number related to the number of stored information on hold in the hold storage means, and a specific image displayed in the pre-effect. The specific effect executing means includes the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect, and the specific effect executing means holds the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the final variable display. When it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is not controlled up to the number of times corresponding to the number of display of the specific image, and the specific effect is controlled based on the variable display of the final time. When the specific hold information is stored or the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the specific hold information is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images. In the final variable display, when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, the number of variable displays executed before the variable display based on the specific hold information is the first and the second. In the case of, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is the same, and the pre-effect execution means prompts the launch of the game medium toward the start area in the final variable display. After the promotion effect is executed, the start area is set when the advance effect can be executed and the execution of the pre-effect is started in a state where the hold information is stored up to the maximum number that can be stored in the hold storage means. Regardless of whether the game medium passes or does not pass, it is possible to execute a pre-effect to display the same number of display numbers as the maximum number of specific images, and after displaying the same number of display numbers as the maximum number of specific images, the specific image It is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode, and in the change effect, when the game medium passes through the start area, the display mode of the specific image is changed and the start area is played. When the change effect ends when the technical medium does not pass, the display mode of the specific image is changed. Here, the starting region may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, and the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The hold storage means may be, for example, a second hold storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, a variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state termination means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect process of step 89AKS02. The pre-production may be, for example, an acquisition production. The pre-effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS 104. The specific effect may be, for example, a notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect process of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the notice content is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the content of the notice is a hit. The variable display time may be common, for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 may be 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed, for example, when the acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. The pre-effect of displaying a specific image having the same number of display numbers as the upper limit of the hold information that can be stored is executed by, for example, determining the number of acquired items to 5 if the second hold storage number is 4 according to the determination example 91AKD01. It may be a production. The change effect may be, for example, an effect of increasing expectations. Changing the display mode of the specific image when the change effect is completed may be, for example, executing the expectation increase effect when the expectation increase condition 92AKC02 is set.
According to such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

A game machine that can perform variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold information. It is possible to control a start winning means that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is more likely to change to the second state. A special state control means, a special state end means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state. The effect executing means is related to a pre-effect executing means capable of executing a pre-effect that displays a specific image of a display number related to the number of stored information on hold in the hold storage means, and a specific image displayed in the pre-effect. The specific effect executing means includes the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect, and the specific effect executing means holds the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the final variable display. When it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is not controlled up to the number of times corresponding to the number of display of the specific image, and the specific effect is controlled based on the variable display of the final time. When the specific hold information is stored or the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the specific hold information is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images. In the final variable display, when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, the number of variable displays executed before the variable display based on the specific hold information is the first and the second. In the case of, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is the same, and the pre-effect execution means prompts the launch of the game medium toward the start area in the final variable display. After the promotion effect is executed, the start area is set when the advance effect can be executed and the execution of the pre-effect is started in a state where the hold information is stored up to the maximum number that can be stored in the hold storage means. Regardless of whether the game medium passes or does not pass, it is possible to execute a pre-effect to display the same number of display numbers as the maximum number of specific images, and after displaying the same number of display numbers as the maximum number of specific images, the specific image It is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode, and the specific image may be changed to a predetermined display mode in the change effect. Here, the starting region may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, and the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The hold storage means may be, for example, a second hold storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, a variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state termination means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect process of step 89AKS02. The pre-production may be, for example, an acquisition production. The pre-effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS 104. The specific effect may be, for example, a notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect process of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the notice content is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the content of the notice is a hit. The variable display time may be common, for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 may be 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed, for example, when the acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. The pre-effect of displaying a specific image having the same number of display numbers as the upper limit of the hold information that can be stored is executed by, for example, determining the number of acquired items to 5 if the second hold storage number is 4 according to the determination example 91AKD01. It may be a production. The change effect may be, for example, an effect of increasing expectations. Changing the specific image to a predetermined display mode in the change effect may be, for example, executing the expectation increase effect when the expectation increase condition 92AKC01 is set.
According to such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

A game machine that can perform variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold information. It is possible to control a start winning means that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the game medium is more likely to pass through the starting area than the first state, and a special state in which the starting winning means is more likely to change to the second state. A special state control means, a special state end means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the final variable display in the special state. The effect executing means is related to a pre-effect executing means capable of executing a pre-effect that displays a specific image of a display number related to the number of stored information on hold in the hold storage means, and a specific image displayed in the pre-effect. The specific effect executing means includes the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect, and the specific effect executing means holds the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is controlled to the advantageous state without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the final variable display. When it is not stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is not controlled up to the number of times corresponding to the number of display of the specific image, and the specific effect is controlled based on the variable display of the final time. When the specific hold information is stored or the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting that the specific hold information is controlled in an advantageous state in relation to any of the displayed specific images. In the final variable display, when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means, the number of variable displays executed before the variable display based on the specific hold information is the first and the second. In the case of, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is the same, and the pre-effect execution means prompts the launch of the game medium toward the start area in the final variable display. After the promotion effect is executed, the start area is set when the advance effect can be executed and the execution of the pre-effect is started in a state where the hold information is stored up to the maximum number that can be stored in the hold storage means. Regardless of whether the game medium passes or does not pass, it is possible to execute a pre-effect to display the same number of display numbers as the maximum number of specific images, and after displaying the same number of display numbers as the maximum number of specific images, the specific image It is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode, and in the change effect, when the game medium passes through the start area, the display mode of the specific image is changed and the start area is played. It is not necessary to execute the change effect when the technical medium does not pass. Here, the starting region may be, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, and the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The hold storage means may be, for example, a second hold storage buffer. The first state may be, for example, a closed state. The second state may be, for example, an open state. The starting winning means may be, for example, a variable winning ball device 15. The special state control means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S163 to S165. The special state termination means may be, for example, a CPU 56 that executes steps S147 to S150. The effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the final variation effect process of step 89AKS02. The pre-production may be, for example, an acquisition production. The pre-effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the acquisition effect process of step AKS 104. The specific effect may be, for example, a notice effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes the advance notice effect process of step AKS108. The specific effect suggesting that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the notice content is a loss notice. The specific effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notice effect in which the content of the notice is a hit. The variable display time may be common, for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 may be 140000 ms. The promotion effect may be executed, for example, when the acquisition promotion notification image is displayed by executing step AKS203. The pre-effect of displaying a specific image having the same number of display numbers as the upper limit of the hold information that can be stored is executed by, for example, determining the number of acquired items to 5 if the second hold storage number is 4 according to the determination example 91AKD01. It may be a production. The change effect may be, for example, an effect of increasing expectations. The change effect may not be executed when the game medium does not pass through the start area, for example, the expectation level increase effect may be executed when the expectation level increase condition 92AKC03 is set.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects common to feature units 90AK to 92AK)
The pre-effect execution means can execute a pre-effect that displays the same number of display numbers of specific images as the upper limit of the number of hold information that can be stored in the hold storage means, and the specific effect execution means is the number of displays displayed in the pre-effect. When the specific effect related to the specific image of is sequentially executed and the number of variable displays executed before the variable display based on the specific hold information is the third number, the identification corresponding to the third number It may be possible to suggest that it is controlled in an advantageous state by a specific effect related to a specific image before the image. Here, the pre-effect of displaying the specific image of the same display number as the maximum number of storable hold information may be, for example, the acquisition effect when the number of acquired characters is determined to be "5". The fact that the specific effects can be sequentially executed may be, for example, when the advance notice effects started at the timings AKT11 to AKT15 are executed. The specific effect related to the specific image before the specific image corresponding to the third number of times may be, for example, the advance notice effect of the hit notice number determined by the determination example 90AKD01.
In such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

The pre-effect execution means may be able to execute the passage notification effect based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area during the execution of the pre-effect. For example, it may be the case where the winning notification effect is executed in steps 90AKS08 and 90AKS09.
In such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

The pre-effect execution means may sequentially display specific images at predetermined timings when the hold information is stored up to the maximum number that can be stored in the hold storage means. For example, it may be a case where the acquisition effect is executed at the acquisition character increase timing set in step 90AKS19.
In such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

It may be possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific image as the game medium passes through the start area. Here, the change effect may be, for example, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation.
In such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

When the first image that can be suggested to be controlled in an advantageous state by the related specific effect is displayed among the specific images, the specific image after the first image is more than the first image. A second image with a low rate of being controlled in an advantageous state may be displayed. For example, it may be a case where an effect image showing a character determined by steps 90AKS15 and 90AKS16 is displayed.
In such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

When the execution of the specific effect is started, it may be possible to execute the special notification effect for notifying that the hold information is not stored up to the maximum number that can be stored in the hold storage means. For example, when the acquisition promotion notification is executed by step AKS203, if the number of second reserved storages is less than the upper limit number, the notification mode may be different.
In such a configuration, appropriate effect control becomes possible.

(Explanation of feature 095AK)
Hereinafter, the feature unit 095AK according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 18-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table with respect to the feature unit 095AK. FIG. 18-1 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure hit determination table with respect to the feature unit 095AK. These tables are stored in the ROM 54. In the feature unit 095AK, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9, the value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, which is shown in FIG. 5 (A) in step S61. Instead of the first special figure hit determination table, the big hit determination is performed for the first special symbol using the first special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (A). Further, in the feature unit 095AK, in the special symbol normal processing, the second special diagram shown in FIG. 5 (B) is set in step S61 in response to the setting of the value indicating “second” in the special symbol pointer. Instead of the hit determination table, the second special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (B) is used to perform a big hit determination and a small hit determination for the second special symbol.

In the first special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (A), a jackpot determination value to be compared with the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, may be set. In the first special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (A), the jackpot determination value is set so that the jackpot is determined at a ratio of 1/199. In the second special figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 18-1 (B), a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the value of random R, which is a random number for hit determination, may be set. In the second special figure hit judgment table shown in FIG. 18-1 (B), the big hit judgment value is set so that the big hit is decided at the ratio of 1/199, and the small hit is decided at the ratio of 1/5. The small hit judgment value is set so as to be performed.

FIG. 18-2 shows a hit type table for the feature portion 095AK. In the hit type table, the hit occurrence condition, the post-hit control state, the number of times of opening, etc. are shown for each hit type. The post-hit control state is a gaming state that can be controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. The number of open times indicates the number of times a round (round game), which is a big hit game, is executed, including the open time in each round. In the hit type table shown in FIG. 18-2, as the hit types, the first special figure big hit X, the first special figure big hit Y, the second special figure big hit X, the second special figure big hit Y, the big hit via small hit A, and the small hit A big hit B via a hit is provided.

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to a small hit, a game ball is won in the operating port, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (V-winning). A big hit occurs via a small hit. The big hit via small hit includes a big hit A via small hit and a big hit B via small hit according to a plurality of types of big hit gaming states having different control states after hit. In both the big hit A via the small hit and the big hit B via the small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is 8 times (on the condition of V winning). 8R) It is a big hit that is opened. In the "opening count" of FIG. 18-2, the case where the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened corresponding to the small hit gaming state is indicated by the "V winning device", and the V-judgment is made according to the big hit gaming state. The case where the operating port of the winning device 87 is opened as the V large winning opening is indicated by the “V large winning opening”.

A big hit that is directly generated by a variable display of a special symbol without going through a small hit is also called a symbol big hit. The symbol jackpot includes the first special symbol jackpot X and the first special symbol jackpot Y according to the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol (first identification information). The second special figure jackpot X and the second special figure jackpot Y are included according to the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the variation display of the second special symbol (second identification information). The first special figure jackpot X, the first special figure jackpot Y, the second special figure jackpot X, and the second special figure jackpot Y are all jackpots in which the jackpot is opened eight times.

In this way, as a big hit, a symbol big hit that is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and a small hit that is generated based on the variable display of the second special symbol are generated by V winning. Includes big hits via small hits. Each jackpot via the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot controlled to a time saving state (specific state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is also called a time saving jackpot.

The time saving state is a state in which the high base control is performed and the time saving control is performed. That is, the time saving state is a special state in which the time saving control is performed. In the time saving state, due to the high base control, the winning of the second starting winning opening 14 occurs at a higher rate than in the normal state, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed at a higher rate than in the normal state. It is executed (the variation display of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state). Further, in the time saving state, the time saving control is performed, so that an effective start winning prize is more likely to occur as compared with the normal state, and the possibility of performing a big hit game is increased. That is, the time saving state is an advantageous state for the player. During the time saving state, the player plays a game aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning opening 14 by right-handed. In the present embodiment, the right-handed promotion notification is performed during the time saving state.

The normal state is a game state different from the game state advantageous for the player, such as a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a time saving state, and a probability change state described later, and the display result in the variable display of the normal symbol is "hit". The probability of becoming a "big hit" and the probability that the display result in the variable display of the special symbol will be a "big hit" are the initial setting states of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return process is performed after the power is turned on. It is a state that is controlled in the same way as (when) is not executed.

The post-hit control state of the first special symbol jackpot X can continue in the time-saving state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed once. The post-hit control state of the first special symbol jackpot Y can be continued in a time-saving state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 99 times. The post-hit control state of the second special symbol jackpot X can continue in a time-saving state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed once. The post-hit control state of the second special symbol jackpot Y can continue in the time saving state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 99 times. The post-hit control state of the big hit A via the small hit can continue in the time saving state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed once. The post-hit control state of the big hit B via the small hit can continue in the time saving state until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 99 times. In this way, after the jackpot game state is completed, the number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state is set to one or 99 times according to the hit type. If a big hit occurs based on the fluctuation display of the special symbol before the end of the time saving state, after the big hit game state ends, the time saving state is set again until the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed according to the hit type. It becomes controllable.

In the time saving state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed at a higher rate than in the normal state, and in the variation display of the second special symbol, as shown in the second special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 18-1 (B). In addition, it is configured to be controllable for small hits where big hits occur based on V winning. Therefore, the larger the number of variable display times that can be executed when the time is shortened as the post-hit control state, the more advantageous states such as the big hit game state and the small hit game state in which a big hit is generated based on the V winning may be controlled. Is high. In the setting of the hit type shown in FIG. 18-2, when the hit type is the second special figure jackpot Y or the jackpot via the small hit B, and the hit type is the second special figure jackpot X or the jackpot via the small hit A. In comparison, the number of variable display times that can be executed is large when the time-saving state is the post-hit control state, and a big hit that is likely to be controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state occurs. As described above, in the present embodiment, after being controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state (after the control to the advantageous state is completed), the second special figure big hit X or a big hit via a small hit The post-hit control state, which is the first state, such as the post-hit control state of A (the post-hit control state in which the time saving state can be continued until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed once), and the second special figure jackpot Y Alternatively, it is controlled to be more advantageous than the first state, such as the post-hit control state of the big hit B via the small hit (the post-hit control state in which the time saving state can be continued until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 99 times). It is configured to be controllable in a post-hit control state, which is a second state with a high possibility.

In the post-hit control state of the second special symbol big hit Y or the big hit B via the small hit, the time saving state can be continued until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 99 times, and in the time saving state, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. It is executed at a higher rate than in the normal state, and in the variation display of the second special symbol, as shown in the second special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 18-1 (B), a small hit occurs at a rate of 1/5. do. Therefore, when the player is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the second special figure big hit Y or the big hit B via the small hit, and is controlled to the time saving state as the post-hit control state after the end of the big hit game state, the player does not fire the game ball. In some cases, and except when the player hits left, if he hits right, a small hit will always occur before the end of the time saving state, and a big hit will occur during the small hit based on the V prize. .. Therefore, when the hit type is the second special figure big hit Y or the big hit B via the small hit, after being controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit is in the short time state as the post-hit control state after the end of the big hit game state. By being controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the V prize, it is substantially determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled twice.

FIG. 18-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure jackpot type determination table with respect to the feature unit 095AK. FIG. 18-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure jackpot type determination table with respect to the feature unit 095AK. FIG. 18-3 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit type determination table via a small hit with respect to the feature unit 095AK. These tables are stored in the ROM 54. In the feature unit 095AK, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9, it is determined to be a big hit, and in response to the setting of the value indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer, in step S73. , The first special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (A) is selected instead of the first special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (C), and the first selected in step S75. Using the special figure jackpot type determination table, the hit type when the jackpot is determined by the first special symbol is determined. Further, in the feature unit 095AK, in the special symbol normal processing, it is determined to be a big hit, and in response to the setting of the value indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer, in step S74, FIG. 5 ( Instead of the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in D), the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (B) is selected, and the second special figure jackpot type selected in step S75. Using the determination table, the hit type when it is determined to be a big hit by the second special symbol is determined. Further, in the feature unit 095AK, in response to the decision to make a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, in step S79, instead of the small hit via big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (E), FIG. The hit when the big hit type determination table via small hit shown in 18-3 (C) is selected and the small hit is determined by the second special symbol using the selected large hit type determination table via small hit in step S80. Determine the type.

The first special figure big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 18-3 (A), the second special figure big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 18-3 (B), and the big hit type via small hit shown in FIG. 18-3 (C). Each determination table may be set with a hit type determination value to be compared with the value of random 1 which is a random number for determining the hit type. The hit type determination value in the first special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (A) may be set corresponding to each of the first special figure jackpot X and the first special figure jackpot Y. In the first special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (A), the first special figure jackpot X is determined at a rate of 99/100, and the first special figure jackpot Y is determined at a rate of 1/100. As a result, the hit type judgment value is set. The hit type determination value in the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (B) may be set corresponding to each of the second special figure jackpot X and the second special figure jackpot Y. In the second special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-3 (B), the second special figure jackpot X is determined at a rate of 99/100, and the second special figure jackpot Y is determined at a rate of 1/100. As a result, the hit type judgment value is set. The hit type judgment values in the big hit type judgment table via small hit shown in FIG. 18-3 (C) are the big hit A via small hit and the small hit via, depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. It suffices if it is set corresponding to each of the jackpot B. In the big hit type determination table via small hit shown in FIG. 18-3 (C), when the game state is the normal state, the big hit via small hit A is determined at a rate of 1/100, and the small hit is determined at a rate of 99/100. If the game is determined to be a jackpot B via a small hit and the game state is in a time saving state, the jackpot via a small hit is determined to be a jackpot A at a rate of 99/100, and the jackpot via a small hit is determined to be a jackpot B at a rate of 1/100. The type judgment value is set.

FIG. 18-4 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern with respect to the feature portion 095AK. The variation pattern shown in FIG. 18-4 can be used in place of a part or all of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 17-3, or together with a part or all of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 17-3 in advance. It suffices if it is prepared. The plurality of fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 18-4 differ from each other in the variable display mode of the special figure fluctuation time and the effect symbol.

FIG. 18-5 shows an example of determining a variation pattern according to a game state and the like with respect to the feature unit 095AK. In the feature unit 095AK, there are a case where the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the time saving state is 1 or more, a case where the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the time saving state is 0, and a case where the time saving state ends. The setting of the determinable pattern is different between the case where the variable display corresponds to the second reserved memory (holding information about the second special symbol) at the time and the case where the display is variable. The remaining number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state is the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, and the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state can be specified as the remaining number of fluctuation displays after the start of the current fluctuation display. Just do it. For example, in the decidable pattern corresponding to the time-saving final fluctuation, which is the final variation display in the time-saving state, the number of fluctuation display times remaining after the start of the current variation display becomes 0, so that in the time-saving state. A decidable pattern is set when the remaining number of variable displays is 0. The fluctuation display this time is a fluctuation display during execution, and is also referred to as the fluctuation. The variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the time saving state has finished the time saving state when each variation display is executed, and the gaming state is in the normal state. However, for the second reserved storage portion at the end of the time saving state, unlike the fluctuation display in other normal states, a special fluctuation pattern can be determined. Therefore, the setting of the decidable pattern is different between the case of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the time saving state and the case of the variable display in the other normal state. Since the player plays the game by hitting right during the time saving state, all the hold memories stored at the end of the time saving state are the second hold memories except when the player hits left. In the determination example shown in FIG. 18-5, when the variable display result is "hit", the hit types are the first special figure big hit X, the first special figure big hit Y, the second special figure big hit X, and the second special. The display result of the special symbol that is one of the big hit Y is "big hit", and the display result of the special symbol whose hit type is either big hit A via small hit or big hit B via small hit is "small hit". The case of is included.

As shown in FIG. 18-5 (A), in the determination example 095AKE01 in the normal state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 ~ PA2-3 are included in the decidable pattern. In the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is not the reach mode, and as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol, the final effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. It is included in the fluctuation pattern. In the variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, after the variable display mode of the effect symbol is changed to the reach mode, the final effect symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a hit combination is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol. It is included in the reach fluctuation pattern to be performed. During the variable display of the effect symbol by any of the variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, the normal reach effect (normal reach) is executed as the reach effect in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the effect symbol. ..

In the variable display of the effect symbol by the variable pattern PA1-4, one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays by temporarily stopping the effect symbol during the variable display and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production shown in is executed. The variable display that is resumed after the effect symbol is temporarily stopped is also called pseudo-continuous variation. When the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is executed, the temporary stop display of the predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol is used to temporarily stop the variable display in a temporary stop mode different from the case where the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is not executed, and then restart the variable display. .. In the variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PA1-4, the final effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. Even in the variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PA2-2, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed once. In the variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PA2-3, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed twice. In the variable display of the effect symbol by any of the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes the reach mode after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once or a plurality of times. Finally, the finalized production symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed.

In the determination example 095AKE01, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are included in the determinable pattern. In the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3, after the variable display mode of the effect symbol is changed to the reach mode, the hit variation pattern in which the final effect symbol of the winning combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol. Included in. During the variable display of the effect symbols by the variable patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3, the normal reach effect is executed as the reach effect in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the effect symbols. In the variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PA3-2, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed once. In the variable display of the effect symbol by the variation pattern PA3-3, the pseudo-continuous variation is executed twice. In the variable display of the effect symbol by any of the variation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes the reach mode after the pseudo-continuous variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once or a plurality of times. , Finally, the final effect symbol of the winning combination is stopped and displayed.

As for the fluctuation pattern in the determination example 095AKE01, when the variable display result is "miss", the fluctuation pattern to be used is determined at a ratio according to the number of reserved memories and the hit expectation, and the variable display result is "hit". In a certain case, a fluctuation pattern to be a usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the hit expectation. For example, when the number of reserved storages is large, a non-reach fluctuation pattern having a shorter special figure fluctuation time at a higher rate than when the number of reserved storages is small may be determined as the usage pattern. When the variable display result is "hit", a fluctuation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is larger than that when the variable display result is "loss" may be determined as the usage pattern. When the variable display result is "hit", the variable pattern may be determined to execute the normal reach effect at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "miss".

As shown in FIG. 18-5 (B), in the determination example 095AKE02 when the remaining number of variations of the variation display in the time saving state is 1 or more, if the variable display result of the special symbol is “missing”, the variation pattern PB1- 1-PB1-3 and PA2-1-1 to PA2-3 are included in the determinable pattern. Fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-3 are included in the non-reach variation patterns. When the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state is 1 or more, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by determining the fluctuation pattern with a shorter special figure fluctuation time as the usage pattern at a higher rate than in the normal state. It suffices if the time reduction control that shortens the time can be performed. In the decidable example 095AKE02, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are included in the decidable pattern as in the decidable example 095AKE01. As for the fluctuation pattern in the determination example 095AKE02, when the variable display result is "miss", the fluctuation pattern to be used is determined at a ratio according to the number of reserved memories and the hit expectation, and the variable display result is "hit". In a certain case, a fluctuation pattern to be a usage pattern is determined at a rate according to the hit expectation.

As shown in FIG. 18-5 (C), in the determination example 095AKE03 in the case where the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the time saving state is 0, the variable display result of the special symbol is “missing”. Only the variable pattern PC1-3 is a decidable pattern, and if the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", only the variable pattern PC3-3 is a decidable pattern. As shown in FIG. 18-4, the fluctuation pattern PC1-3 and the fluctuation pattern PC3-3 are both fluctuation patterns in which the special figure fluctuation time is 140000 ms (milliseconds). Therefore, the time-saving final fluctuation, which is the final variation display in the time-saving state, has the same special figure fluctuation time depending on whether the variable display result is "missing" or "hit". Fluctuation pattern PC1-3 is included in the reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern PC3-3 is included in the hit fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 18-5 (D), in the determination example 095AKE04 in the case of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the time saving state, if the variable display result of the special symbol is “missing”, If only the variable pattern PD1-1 is a decidable pattern and the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 are included in the decidable pattern. As shown in FIG. 18-4, the variation pattern PD1-1 is a variation pattern in which the variation display time is extremely short, such as the special figure variation time of 500 ms. Therefore, if the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing", the variable display corresponding to the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state is repeatedly started and ended within a short period of time, so that the second hold The memory is digested. Further, when the variable display result of the special symbol is "hit", the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state has a shorter special symbol variation time than the variable display in other gaming states. Since it is easy to become, it is easy to derive a definite effect symbol of a winning combination in a short period of time. The variation pattern PD1-1 is included in the non-reach variation pattern. Fluctuation patterns PD3-1 and PD3-2 are included in the hit variation patterns.

In the feature unit 095AK, when the time saving state is controlled and the time saving final fluctuation (predetermined variable display) is executed, the time saving suggesting that the time saving is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. It is configured so that the final fluctuation effect can be executed. In the present embodiment, a super reach effect (specific effect) and a relief effect (special effect) can be executed as the time-saving final variation effect.

The super reach effect displays either a success result (specific effect result) for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state or a failure result (predetermined effect result) for notifying that the effect is not controlled in the advantageous state. It is a possible production. In the present embodiment, when it is controlled in the time saving state, it is configured to be controllable to either the symbol fanning mode or the battle mode, and is controlled to the symbol fanning mode (the first). While it is possible to execute the super reach effect in the symbol fanning mode (first effect mode) when it is controlled to the 1 effect state, it is controlled to the battle mode (controlled to the second effect state). ) At times, the super reach effect can be executed in a battle mode (second effect mode) different from the symbol fanning mode. The symbol fanning mode is an effect mode in which the effect symbol of the hit combination or the effect symbol of the reach loss combination is temporarily stopped after the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The battle mode is an effect mode in which a moving image showing how the ally character wins or loses the enemy character is reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 after the ally character and the enemy character battle. ..

Hereinafter, the super reach effect that displays the success result of the symbol fanning mode is referred to as "success symbol production", and the super reach effect that displays the failure result of the symbol fanning mode is referred to as "failed symbol production". In the present embodiment, as a successful symbol effect, an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode and then the effect symbol of the hit combination is temporarily stopped can be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, as a failure symbol effect, an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode and then the effect symbol of the reach loss combination is temporarily stopped can be executed. Further, hereinafter, the super reach effect that displays the success result of the battle mode is referred to as "success battle effect", and the super reach effect that displays the failure result of the battle mode is referred to as "failure battle effect". In the present embodiment, as a successful battle effect, a moving image showing how the ally character wins the enemy character after the ally character and the enemy character battle on the screen of the effect display device 9 is reproduced and displayed. It is configured so that the effect to be performed can be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, as a failure battle effect, on the screen of the effect display device 9, a moving image showing how the ally character is defeated by the enemy character after the ally character and the enemy character battle is reproduced. It is configured so that the effect of displaying can be executed.

The relief effect is different from the super reach effect, and is an effect that suggests that the effect is controlled in an advantageous state. In the present embodiment, as a relief effect, the ally character and the enemy character battle on the screen of the effect display device 9, and after the ally character is once defeated by the enemy character, both the ally character and the enemy character are both. A different rescue character appears, and it is configured to be able to perform an effect of reproducing and displaying a moving image showing how a ally character wins over an enemy character.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled by the symbol fanning mode (first effect state), the current variation display (variable display during execution), which is the time saving final variation, and When the fluctuation display corresponding to the second hold storage currently stored by the second hold storage buffer (hold storage means) and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second hold storage are controlled in an advantageous state at least once, it succeeds as a time-saving final fluctuation effect. It is configured so that the design effect can be executed. The variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage stored when the current variation display, which is the time saving final variation, is executed is the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage at the end of the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode, the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored are displayed. If the advantageous state is not controlled in any of the above, the failed symbol effect can be executed as the time saving final variation effect.

With such a configuration, when the success symbol production, which is a super reach effect for displaying the success result, is executed while being controlled to the symbol fanning mode, the current variable display and the currently stored second hold It is notified that the variable display corresponding to the memory is controlled to the advantageous state at least once.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode (second production state), the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation corresponding to the currently stored second hold storage are performed. When the display and the variable display of at least two times are controlled to be advantageous, the successful battle effect can be executed as the time-saving final variable effect. Further, in the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored are displayed. When the change display is controlled to the big hit game state of the second special figure big hit Y or the small hit game state in which the hit type at the time of V winning is the big hit B via the small hit, the time saving final fluctuation effect is produced. It is configured to be able to execute a successful battle production. That is, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, at least one fluctuation of the current fluctuation display and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored is performed. When the display is controlled to an advantageous state, and after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot Y as the second state or the jackpot B via the small hit, as a time saving final variation effect. It is configured to be able to execute a successful battle production. As described above, when the big hit game state of the second special figure big hit Y or the big hit B via the small hit is controlled, the V prize during the small hit is won in the time saving state as the post-hit control state after the end of the big hit game state. By being controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the above, it is substantially determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled twice. That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored are displayed. , When it is controlled to the advantageous state at least twice, or when it is substantially determined that it is controlled to the advantageous state at least twice, it is configured to be able to execute a successful battle effect as a time-saving final variation effect. ..

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, one of the current variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored. When it is controlled to an advantageous state in the variation display of one time, and it is not controlled to the advantageous state in the variation display different from the one variation display of the current variation display and the variation display for the second reserved storage currently stored. , It is configured to be able to execute a relief effect as a time-saving final variation effect. Specifically, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, one of the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored. In the variable display, it is controlled to the big hit game state of the second special figure big hit X and the small hit game state in which the hit type when the V prize occurs is the big hit A via the small hit, and this variable display and the present memory are stored. When the variation display corresponding to the second hold storage and the variation display different from the one variation display are not controlled in an advantageous state, the relief effect can be executed as the time-saving final variation effect. That is, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored are displayed once. In the advantageous state, after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot X as the first state or the jackpot A via the small hit, and the current fluctuation display and the current memory. When the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage and the variable display different from the one-time variable display are not controlled in an advantageous state, the relief effect can be executed as the time-saving final variable effect.

In addition, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, one variable display of the current fluctuation display and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second hold storage currently stored. In the second special figure, the big hit game state of the big hit Y and the small hit game state in which the hit type when the V prize occurs is the big hit B via the small hit are controlled, and this fluctuation display and the currently stored second When the variable display corresponding to the hold memory and the variable display different from the one-time variable display are not controlled in an advantageous state, the successful battle effect is executed as the time-saving final variable display. That is, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored are displayed once. In the advantageous state, after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure big hit Y as the second state or the big hit B via the small hit, and the current fluctuation display and the current memory. When the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory and the variable display different from the one-time variable display are not controlled in an advantageous state, the successful battle effect is executed as the time-saving final variable effect.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, in either the current fluctuation display or the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored. If it is not controlled in an advantageous state, it is configured to be able to execute a failed battle effect as a time-saving final variation effect.

With such a configuration, when the success battle effect, which is a super reach effect that displays the success result, is executed while the battle mode is controlled, the current variable display and the currently stored second hold memory are executed. In the variation display corresponding to, it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state at least twice, or is substantially determined to be controlled to the advantageous state at least twice.

In this way, in the feature unit 095AK, when the super reach effect (success battle effect) that displays the success result when controlled in the battle mode is executed, the success result is displayed when the pattern fan mode is controlled. It is configured so that the advantage for the player is higher than when the super reach effect (successful pattern effect) to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the super reach effect executed when controlled in the battle mode is more important to the player than the super reach effect executed when controlled in the symbol fanning mode. In the present embodiment, due to such a configuration, the design fanning mode and the battle mode are different from each other in the playability (game nature), such as the importance of the super reach effect to the player is different from each other. It is configured to be.

As described above, in the feature unit 095AK, when controlled in the symbol fanning mode, the super reach effect can be executed in the symbol fanning mode, while when controlled in the battle mode, the symbol fanning mode is used. It is configured to be able to perform super reach production in different battle modes. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize which of the effect modes in which the playability is controlled, which is different from each other, based on the effect mode of the super reach effect. It is possible to pay attention to the effect mode of the reach effect, and to execute the super reach effect in the effect mode according to the state (effect mode) to improve the game entertainment.

Hereinafter, when the display result of the special symbol in the fluctuation display is a "hit" which is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol (controlled to an advantageous state based on the fluctuation display), the fluctuation display is referred to as "hit fluctuation". There is. Further, hereinafter, when the display result of the special symbol in the variation display is a "loss" in which the special symbol is a lost symbol (it is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the variation display), the variation display may be referred to as "loss variation". Further, hereinafter, the variation display corresponding to the hold storage (variation display executed based on the hold memory) may be referred to as "hold change". Further, hereinafter, when the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold storage is a hit change, the hold memory may be referred to as a “hit hold”. Further, hereinafter, when the variation display corresponding to the hold memory is a loss change, the hold memory may be referred to as "loss hold".

The feature unit 095AK is configured to be able to execute a super reach suggestion effect (suggestion effect) in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction final variation effect (super reach effect, relief effect) when the time reduction final variation is being executed. ..

The super reach suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the super reach effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the super reach effect is executed after the super reach suggestion effect is executed, and the time saving final variation ends without the super reach effect being executed after the super reach suggestion effect is executed. It is configured so that there are cases and cases. If the time saving final fluctuation ends without executing the super reach effect after the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the relief effect is performed without executing the super reach effect after the super reach suggestion effect is executed. Is executed and the time saving final variation ends, and after the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the time saving final variation ends without executing either the super reach effect or the relief effect. ing.

Hereinafter, when the super reach suggestion effect is executed after the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the super reach suggestion effect is referred to as a "genuine super reach suggestion effect". Further, hereinafter, after the super reach suggestion effect is executed, when the time saving final variation ends without executing the super reach effect, the super reach suggestion effect is referred to as "Gase super reach suggestion effect". Hereinafter, when the genuine super reach suggestion effect and the Gase super reach suggestion effect are not distinguished from each other, it is simply referred to as a super reach suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display in the time saving state including the time saving final variation is executed, after the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the variable display of the effect symbol is temporarily stopped by a loss combination and then changed. Pseudo-variable display (special variable display) that reappears (restarts) the display can be executed once or multiple times, and when the pseudo-variable display is executed multiple times in the time saving final variation, the plurality of pseudo-variable displays The super reach suggestion effect can be executed during the period when any one of the pseudo-variable displays is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-variable display, the variable display of the small symbol is not temporarily stopped. Note that this is only an example, and the variable display of the small symbol may be temporarily stopped when the variable display of the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-variable display.

It should be noted that the pseudo-variable display is similar to the pseudo-continuous production in that one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. However, in the pseudo-continuous production, in general, as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases, the degree of expectation of hitting increases, whereas in the pseudo-variable display in the present embodiment, one variable display is simply simulated. It is a production to make it look like a variable display multiple times.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the post-hit control state is configured such that the number of times the variation of the special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed may be a relatively small number such as one (1 time). See Figure 18-2). Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving final fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern having a long special figure fluctuation time such as fluctuation patterns PC1-3 and PC3-3 is determined. (See FIG. 18-5 (C)). Therefore, in the present embodiment, by executing the pseudo-variable display a plurality of times in a short span in the time-saving final fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by feeling that the time-saving state has ended with a small number of fluctuation display times. However, it is configured so that the decline in the game interest can be suppressed. In other words, in the present embodiment, in the time saving final fluctuation, by executing the pseudo-variable display a plurality of times in a short span, the number of fluctuations displayed in the time saving state is shown to be large, the period controlled by the time saving state is shown to be long, and the game is played. It is structured so that it can improve the interest.

In the present embodiment, when controlled to the symbol fanning mode, the tempai fanning effect can be executed as the super reach suggestion effect, while when controlled to the battle mode, the ally character appearance effect is performed as the super reach suggestion effect. It is configured to be executable. In the tempai fanning effect, after the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display area 9L on the "left", the same effect symbol as the effect symbol moves closer to or away from the effect symbol display area 9R on the "right". By repeating the above, the same effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, and the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. .. In the ally character appearance effect, an enemy character appears and a battle is started with the ally character by playing back and displaying a moving image showing how the ally character appears on the screen of the effect display device 9. It is a production that suggests that.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state of being controlled in the symbol fanning mode, the countdown effect can be executed in addition to the time saving final variation effect and the super reach suggestion effect described above. ing. On the other hand, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled by the battle mode, the countdown effect is not executed. The countdown effect is an effect of performing a countdown display on the screen of the effect display device 9 indicating the remaining time until the end of the final time reduction variation.

In the present embodiment, when the success symbol effect is executed as the time-saving final variation effect, the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the time-saving final variation, and the success symbol effect is started. It is configured so that the countdown effect ends. On the other hand, when the failed symbol effect is executed as the time-saving final variation effect, the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the time-saving final variation, and the time-saving final variation ends after the failed symbol effect is completed. It is configured so that the countdown effect ends in response to. When the countdown effect ends in response to the end of the time reduction final variation, the time-out display indicating that the remaining time until the end of the time reduction final variation is 0 seconds is performed in the countdown effect. When the success symbol effect is executed as the time-saving final variation effect, the countdown effect ends before the end of the time-saving final variation in response to the start of the success symbol effect, so that the time-out display in the countdown effect is displayed. Is not done. In the present embodiment, the countdown effect is not executed when the time-saving final variation effect (success symbol effect, failure symbol effect) is not executed. It should be noted that this is only an example, and the countdown effect may be configured to be executable when the time saving final variation effect is not executed.

In the feature unit 095AK, when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is controlled to either the symbol fanning mode or the battle mode, and the time saving final fluctuation ends and the control to the time saving state ends. Correspondingly, the control to the effect mode is terminated. In the present embodiment, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode, the time saving final variation ends, the control to the time saving state ends, and the control to the symbol fanning mode ends. In response to this, for example, in the countdown effect, an effect of displaying the time-out is performed. On the other hand, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, the time saving final fluctuation ends, the control to the time saving state ends, and the control to the battle mode ends. Then, for example, a failure battle production is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the control to the symbol fanning mode is finished, it is possible to execute an effect different from that when the control to the battle mode is finished. According to such a configuration, when the control to the effect modes having different game characteristics is completed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved by executing the different effects.

FIG. 18-6 shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects when the time saving final variation is executed in the state of being controlled in the symbol fanning mode with respect to the feature unit 095AK.

Specifically, in FIG. 18-6 (A), the loss variation is executed as the time saving final variation in the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode, and the first and second of the second reserved memories at the end of the time saving state are executed. The second hold memory (hold information corresponding to 1 and 2 of the second hold memory) is a lost hold, and the third second hold memory (hold information corresponding to 3 of the second hold memory) is a hit. The execution period and execution timing of various effects are shown in relation to the case of holding. More specifically, FIG. 18-6 (A) shows a case where the tempai fanning effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time saving final variation. In relation to, the execution period and execution timing of various effects are shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (A), the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the time saving final fluctuation, and the first pseudo-variable display is started. After the first and second pseudo-variable display is executed, the tempai tenpai effect (super reach suggestion effect) is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. When the tempai fanning effect ends in response to the end of the third pseudo-variable display, the successful symbol effect (super reach effect) as the time-saving final variation effect is started, and the successful symbol effect is started. The countdown production ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the super reach suggestion effect is executed after the super reach suggestion effect (genuine super reach suggestion effect) is executed, the super reach effect corresponds to the end of the super reach suggestion effect. Is configured to start. In the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (A), the successful symbol effect ends corresponding to the end of the time-saving final variation effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the super reach effect for displaying the success result such as the success symbol effect and the success battle effect is configured to end in response to the end of the time-saving final variation effect.

In the present embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (A), when the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state includes a hold, FIG. 18 As shown in −6 (A), the hit hold standby effect starts before a predetermined period (1 second in the present embodiment) before the time reduction final variation ends and the display result of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. At the same time, it is configured to be controlled so that the effect symbol is not displayed and the effect symbol is not displayed. It should be noted that the small symbol is displayed when the effect symbol is controlled to be hidden. In the hit hold standby effect, by displaying an effect image showing the hit hold standby character on the screen of the effect display device 9, the start of the hit variation corresponding to the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state is waiting. Is notified to the player. Further, in the hit hold standby effect, a message is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the control to the effect mode controlled during the time saving state has been completed. When the hit hold standby effect is executed during the period when the time-saving final variation effect such as the success symbol effect, the success battle effect, and the relief effect is executed, the display control of the hit hold standby effect may be executed with priority. It should be noted that the time saving final variation effect may be configured to end in response to the start of the hit hold standby effect. As shown in FIG. 18-6 (A), the hit hold standby effect is continuously executed even after the end of the time reduction final variation, and the hit variation corresponding to the second hold storage at the end of the time reduction state (FIG. 18-6 (FIG. 18-6 (A)). In the example shown in A), the variable display corresponding to the third second reserved storage) ends in response to the start. Corresponding to the end of the hit hold standby effect, the control to the effect symbol non-display state ends and the display of the effect symbol is resumed.

According to such a configuration, when the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation and the hit holding is included in the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state, it is controlled to the advantageous state based on the hit hold. When a super reach effect or a relief effect that displays a success result suggesting that is executed, the final effect symbol of the loss combination is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the player is confused and the game is enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the player from decreasing, and to maintain the player's expectation that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state after the end of the final time-saving fluctuation until the hit fluctuation based on the hit hold is started, and to improve the game interest. Can be done.

In FIG. 18-6 (B), the loss variation is executed as the time saving final variation in the state controlled to the symbol fanning mode, and all the second hold memories (1st to 4th second hold) at the end of the time saving state are executed. (Memory) is on hold, and the execution period and execution timing of various effects are shown in relation to the case where the tempai fanning effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display in the time saving final fluctuation is executed. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the time saving final fluctuation, and the first pseudo-variable display is started. After the first and second pseudo-variable display is executed, the tempai fanning effect is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. When the tempai fanning effect is completed in response to the end of the third pseudo-variable display, the failed symbol effect as the time-saving final variation effect is started. In the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), the failed symbol effect ends corresponding to the elapse of a predetermined effect period from the start. As described above, in the present embodiment, the super reach effect that displays the failure result such as the failure symbol effect and the failure battle effect is configured to be able to end in response to the elapse of a predetermined effect period from the start. There is. In the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), the fourth pseudo-variable display is started in response to the end of the failed symbol effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-variable display can be executed after the super reach effect for displaying the failure result such as the failure symbol effect and the failure battle effect is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), the 1st to 3rd pseudo-variable display is executed before the failed symbol effect is started, and the 4th to 35th pseudo-variable display is executed after the failed symbol effect is completed. By being executed, the pseudo-variable display is executed 35 times in the time saving final fluctuation.

In the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), the time-out display is performed in the countdown effect in response to the end of the time reduction final variation, and the countdown effect ends. In the present embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), when the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state does not include the holding, FIG. 18 As shown in −6 (B), in response to the end of the time saving final fluctuation, the result effect at the time of loss is started, and the effect symbol is controlled to be hidden. In the result effect at the time of loss, a display is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in the big hit game state or the small hit game state until the time saving state ends. Specifically, the effect control command for specifying the number of game balls paid out as a prize ball is configured to be transmitable from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, and the number of game balls specified by the effect control command is lost. It may be notified by the time result production. Further, in the result effect at the time of loss, a message is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 notifying that the control to the effect mode controlled during the time saving state is completed. As shown in FIG. 18-6 (B), the result effect at the time of loss is continuously executed even after the end of the final time reduction change, and the change display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time reduction state is completed. Correspondingly ends. Corresponding to the end of the result effect at the time of loss, the control to the effect symbol non-display state ends and the display of the effect symbol is resumed.

According to such a configuration, the player is given the impression that the final variation of the time saving and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state are a consistent series of variation displays, and the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

FIG. 18-7 shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled by the battle mode with respect to the feature unit 095AK.

Specifically, in FIG. 18-7 (A), the loss variation is executed as the time saving final variation in the state controlled in the battle mode, and the first and second second reserved memories at the end of the time saving state are executed. When the 2 hold memory is a lost hold, the 3rd 2nd hold memory is a hit hold, and the ally character appearance effect is executed during the period when the 3rd pseudo-variable display in the time saving final fluctuation is executed. Relatedly, the execution period and execution timing of various effects are shown. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7 (A), the first pseudo-variable display is started in response to the start of the time-saving final fluctuation. After the first and second pseudo-variable display is executed, the ally character appearance effect (super reach suggestion effect) is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. Corresponding to the end of the third pseudo-variable display, the ally character appearance effect ends, and in response to the end of the ally character appearance effect, a successful battle effect is started as a time-saving final variable effect. The successful battle production ends in response to the end of the time saving final fluctuation.

In FIG. 18-7 (B), in the state controlled in the battle mode, the hit variation in which the hit type is the second special figure jackpot X is executed as the time reduction final variation, and all the second hold memories at the end of the time reduction state are stored. Is a loss hold, and indicates the execution period and execution timing of various effects in relation to the case where the ally character appearance effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display in the time saving final fluctuation is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7 (B), the first pseudo-variable display is started in response to the start of the time-saving final fluctuation. After the first and second pseudo-variable display is executed, the ally character appearance effect (super reach suggestion effect) is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. The ally character appearance effect ends in response to the end of the third pseudo-variable display, and the relief effect as the time-saving final variation effect starts in response to the end of the ally character appearance effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, after the super reach suggestion effect is executed, if the relief effect is executed as the time-saving final variation effect without executing the super reach effect, the super reach suggestion effect ends. It is configured so that the relief effect is started in response to. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7 (B), the relief effect ends corresponding to the end of the time saving final variation. As described above, in the present embodiment, the relief effect is configured to end in response to the end of the time saving final variation.

In FIG. 18-7 (C), the loss variation is executed as the time reduction final variation in the state controlled in the battle mode, and all the second hold memories at the end of the time reduction state are the loss hold, and 3 in the time reduction final variation. It shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects in relation to the case where the ally character appearance effect is executed during the period when the second pseudo-variable display is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7 (C), the first pseudo-variable display is started in response to the start of the time-saving final fluctuation. After the first and second pseudo-variable display is executed, the ally character appearance effect is started in response to the start of the third pseudo-variable display. Corresponding to the end of the third pseudo-variable display, the ally character appearance effect ends, and in response to the end of the ally character appearance effect, the failed battle effect as the time-saving final variable effect is started. The failed battle effect ends in response to the elapse of a predetermined effect period from the start, and the fourth pseudo-variable display is started in response to the end of the failed battle effect. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7 (C), the 1st to 3rd pseudo-variable display is executed before the failed battle effect is started, and the 4th to 35th pseudo-variable display is executed after the failed battle effect is completed. By being executed, the pseudo-variable display is executed 35 times in the time saving final fluctuation. In the example shown in FIG. 18-7 (C), in response to the end of the time saving final variation, the result effect at the time of loss is started, and the effect symbol is controlled to be hidden. The result effect at the time of loss is continuously executed even after the end of the final time reduction, and ends in response to the end of the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time reduction state, and the result effect at the time of loss ends. Corresponding to this, the control to the effect symbol non-display state ends and the display of the effect symbol is resumed.

FIG. 18-8 shows an example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the final time reduction fluctuation with respect to the feature portion 095AK. Specifically, in FIG. 18-8 (A), the time saving final fluctuation is lost, and the first and second second holding memories of the second holding memory at the end of the time saving state are lost holdings, and three pieces are lost. An example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the final change in time reduction is shown in relation to the case where the second hold memory of the eye is a hit hold. In FIG. 18-8 (B), the time saving final fluctuation is lost, and all the second holding storages (1st to 4th second holding memories) of the second holding memories at the end of the time saving state are lost holdings. In relation to a certain case, an example of a small symbol that is stopped and displayed after the final change in time reduction is shown.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state includes a hit holding, the time saving final fluctuation and the fluctuation display corresponding to the hit holding are started. In the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage until the end, in the variable display of the small symbol, the confirmed small symbol that is the special display result including the special symbol indicating the letter V as the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured as follows. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 18-8 (A), the display result of the special symbol is lost in both the time saving final variation and the variation display corresponding to the first and second second reserved storage. Corresponding to the "loss", the fixed small symbol, which is the special display result, is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the small symbol. Then, in the variable display corresponding to the third second reserved memory, the winning combination is confirmed by the variable display of the small symbol corresponding to the "hit" in which the display result of the special symbol is the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol. The small symbol is stopped and displayed. According to such a configuration, when the hit hold standby effect is executed and the effect symbol is controlled to be hidden, the fixed small symbol that is the special display result is stopped and displayed to control the effect to an advantageous state. It is possible to notify the player that the game will be played and improve the game's interest.

On the other hand, when the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation and the second holding storage at the end of the time saving state does not include the holding, the time saving final fluctuation and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second holding storage are displayed. , In the variable display of the small symbol, the confirmed small symbol of the loss combination is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 18-8 (B), the display result of the special symbol is lost in both the time-saving final variation and the variation display corresponding to the first to fourth second reserved storage. Corresponding to the "loss", the small symbol is variably displayed, and the confirmed small symbol of the loss combination is stopped and displayed.

The feature unit 095AK is configured to be controllable to either a symbol fanning mode or a battle mode, depending on the player's selection, when the time is controlled to be shortened. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to select which of the production modes in which the game playability is controlled to be controlled, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot end effect (big hit) that notifies the player that the control to the jackpot game state is completed during the predetermined jackpot end effect period in response to the end of the control to the jackpot game state. The ending effect) can be executed, and during the jackpot end effect period, the player can control which effect mode is controlled, the symbol fan mode or the battle mode, in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. Is configured to be selectable. Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a mode selection effect that prompts the player to select one of the effect mode, the symbol fan mode and the battle mode, during the jackpot end effect period. When the mode selection effect is being executed, a predetermined mode selection operation (in the present embodiment, a pressing operation on the push button 120) is detected by the push button 120 as an operation means capable of detecting the operation by the player. The effect mode can be selected based on what has been done.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the mode selection effect is started, the symbol fanning mode is controlled to be selected (it is controlled to the symbol fanning mode as a default). , When the mode selection effect is being executed, the selected effect mode is switched each time the mode selection operation is detected by the push button 120. When the jackpot end effect period ends, the jackpot end effect ends, the mode selection effect ends, the selection of the effect mode selected at that time is confirmed, and the effect mode is shortened after the end of the jackpot game state. It is determined as an effect mode controlled in the state. In the present embodiment, when the time is controlled to be shortened, the player is informed of which of the effect mode, the symbol fanning mode and the battle mode, is controlled on the screen of the effect display device 9. Notifying mode Notifying is configured to be executed.

FIG. 18-9 shows a display example when the mode selection effect is executed with respect to the feature unit 095AK. FIG. 18-9 (A) shows a display example in a state in which the symbol fanning mode is selected. FIG. 18-9 (B) shows a display example in which the battle mode is selected.

In the mode selection effect, as shown in FIG. 18-9 (A), by performing a mode selection operation on the screen of the effect display device 9, one of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode can be set. The mode selection promotion image 095AK01 that prompts the player to select is displayed. The mode selection promotion image 095AK01 includes an image showing the shape of the push button 120 and an image showing the message "Press the button to select a mode!" As an image prompting the mode selection operation for the push button 120. There is. Further, the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 includes an image showing which of the pattern fanning mode and the battle mode is currently selected. In the state shown in FIG. 18-9 (A), the symbol fanning mode is selected, and the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the symbol fanning mode is selected.

When the mode selection operation is detected by the push button 120 in the state shown in FIG. 18-9 (A), the battle mode is switched to the state shown in FIG. 18-9 (B). In the state shown in FIG. 18-9 (B), the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the battle mode is selected. When the mode selection operation is detected by the push button 120 in the state shown in FIG. 18-9 (B), the mode is switched to the state in which the symbol fanning mode shown in FIG. 18-9 (A) is selected. If a mode selection operation is performed on the push button 120 while the mode selection effect is being executed, the mode selection operation is detected by the push sensor 124. The push sensor 124 transmits (transmits) a detection signal indicating the detection result of the mode selection operation to the effect control CPU 101. The effect control CPU 101 switches the selected effect mode based on the detection signal received from the push sensor 124.

In the states shown in FIGS. 18-9 (A) and 18-9 (B), the jackpot end effect is executed. In the jackpot end effect, as shown in FIG. 18-9 (A), by displaying the message "big hit end" on the screen of the effect display device 9, it is notified that the control to the jackpot game state is completed. Will be done. Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 18-9 (A) and 18-9 (B), in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, as a definite effect symbol. The jackpot symbol (“666”) has been derived, and the same fixed small symbol as the final effect symbol has been derived in the small symbol display area 9K. Further, in the states shown in FIGS. 18-9 (A) and 18-9 (B), the right-handed promotion notification is performed in the right-handed display area 9Z, and the image showing the message "right-handed" and the right An image showing an arrow pointing in a direction and an image are displayed.

FIG. 18-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S807 of the effect control process process as the jackpot end effect process with respect to the feature unit 095AK.

When the jackpot end effect process is started, the effect control CPU 101 first executes the jackpot end effect during the jackpot end effect period based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 103. Whether or not it is determined (step 095AKS101).

When it is determined that the jackpot end effect period is reached (step 095AKS101; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 controls to execute the jackpot end effect (step 095AKS102), and then controls to execute the mode selection effect (step 095AKS102). 095AKS103), the jackpot end effect process is completed.

When it is determined in step 095AKS101 that it is not the jackpot end effect period (step 095AKS101; No), the effect control CPU 101 sets the currently selected effect mode of the symbol fanning mode and the battle mode to the jackpot game state. It is determined as the effect mode to be controlled in the time saving state after the end (step 095AKS104).

After executing the process of step 095AKS104, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step 095AKS104 whether or not the battle mode is determined as the effect mode controlled in the time saving state (step 095AKS105). When it is determined that the battle mode is determined as the effect mode controlled in the time saving state (step 095AKS105; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 sets the battle mode flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 103 to the on state (step). 095AKS106). The battle mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the battle mode is controlled, and is set to the on state when the battle mode is controlled, and is set to the off state when the battle mode is not controlled. NS.

After executing the process of step 095AKS106, or in step 095AKS105, it is determined that the battle mode is not determined as the effect mode controlled in the time saving state (the symbol fanning mode is determined as the effect mode controlled in the time saving state). If this is the case (step 095AKS105; No), the effect control CPU 101 sets the sub-side time saving flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 103 to the ON state (step 095AKS107). The sub-side time saving flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state is controlled, and is set to the on state when the time saving state is controlled, while it is set to the off state when the time saving state is not controlled. Will be done.

After executing the process of step 095AKS107, the effect control CPU 101 sets the sub-side time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time reduction counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 103, to the initial value according to the hit type. (Step 095AKS108). The sub-side time reduction counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the time reduction state. In step 095AKS108, the sub-side time reduction count value is set to an initial value according to the post-hit control state for each hit type shown in FIG. 18-2. Specifically, the hit type is the post-hit control state, and the time saving state can be continued until the variation display of the special symbol is executed once. The first special figure big hit X, the second special figure big hit X, via the small hit In the case of any of the jackpot A, in step 095AKS108, the sub-side time reduction count value is set to "1". In addition, the hit type is the post-hit control state, and the time saving state can be continued until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 99 times. In any of the above cases, in step 095AKS108, the sub-side time reduction count value is set to "99".

After executing the process of step 095AKS108, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step 095AKS109), and ends the jackpot end effect process.

FIG. 18-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S801 of the effect control process process as the effect symbol variation start process with respect to the feature unit 095AK.

When the effect symbol variation start process is started, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction flag is set to the on state, thereby determining whether or not the effect control is controlled to the time reduction state ( Step 095AKS201). When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is set to the on state (controlled to the time saving state) (step 095AKS201; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the sub-side time saving count value. By updating (step 095AKS202) and determining whether or not the updated sub-side time reduction count value is "0", it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the time reduction final variation (step 095AKS203). ).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (the current variation display is the time reduction final variation) (step 095AKS203; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 executes the time reduction final variation effect determination process. (Step 095AKS204). In the time-saving final variation effect determination process, the effect contents such as whether or not the time-saving final variation effect is executed, the type, the execution mode, and the execution timing are determined. Further, in the time-saving final variation effect determination process, the content of the effect such as whether or not the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the type, the execution mode, and the execution timing are determined. Further, in the time-saving final variation effect determination process, the effect contents such as whether or not the countdown effect is executed, the execution timing, the number of times the pseudo-variable display is executed, and the execution timing are determined.

After executing the process of step 095AKS204, the effect control CPU 101 displays the current variation, which is the final variation in time reduction, based on, for example, the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command transmitted from the main board 31. It is determined whether or not the variable display result of is "missing" (step 095AKS205). When it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display this time is not "missing" (step 095AKS205; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218.

In step 095AKS205, when it is determined that the variable display result of the current fluctuation display, which is the time-saving final fluctuation, is “missing” (step 095AKS205; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is currently checking the hold-related data. It is determined whether or not the stored second hold storage includes a hold (step 095AKS206). The hold-related data is storage data that can specify the contents specified by the symbol designation command or the variation type command transmitted from the main board 31, and is stored in the storage area of the hold-related data storage unit provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 103. It is remembered).

The hold-related data storage unit includes a first hold-related data storage unit 095AKM01 shown in FIG. 18-12 (A) and a second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02 shown in FIG. 18-12 (B). In the first hold-related data storage unit 095AKM01 and the second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02, for example, a storage area for storing data that can identify the symbol designation and the variation type designation in association with the hold number is secured. Has been done. The symbol designation that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the content of the notification by the symbol designation command. The variable type specification that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the content specified by the variable type command. In the first hold-related data storage unit 095AKM01 and the second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02, the symbol designation command and the variation type transmitted from the main board 31 in the command analysis process executed in step S704 of the effect control main process. Hold-related data corresponding to the command notification content is stored in association with the hold number. Specifically, the first hold-related data storage unit 095AKM01 stores the hold-related data corresponding to the first hold storage related to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02 stores the second hold-related data. Hold-related data corresponding to the second hold storage related to the variable display of the special symbol is stored. In step 095AKS206, by confirming the hold-related data corresponding to the second hold storage stored in the second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02, whether or not the currently stored second hold storage includes hold. It is sufficient to judge whether or not.

Returning to FIG. 18-11, when it is determined in step 095AKS206 that the currently stored second hold storage does not include a hold (step 095AKS206; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second hold storage currently stored includes the hit hold (step 095AKS206; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 sets the hit hold waiting flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 103. By setting it in the ON state, the setting of the hit hold standby is performed (step 095AKS207), and the process shifts to step 095AKS218. The hit hold waiting flag is a flag indicating whether or not the hit hold wait setting is made, and is set to the on state when the hit hold wait setting is made, while the hit hold wait flag is set. It is set to the off state when the medium setting is not made. As will be described later, the setting of the hit hold standby is set in response to the fact that the time saving final fluctuation is the loss fluctuation and the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state includes the hit hold (step 095AKS206; Yes). If it is broken (step 095AKS207), the hit hold standby effect is executed in the time saving final fluctuation (step 095AKS305). On the other hand, in response to the fact that the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation and the hit holding is not included in the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state (step 095AKS206: No), the setting of the hit hold standby is not performed. In the case, the result effect at the time of loss is executed in the time saving final fluctuation (step 095AKS326).

In step 095AKS203, when it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is not "0" (the current variation display is a variation display in a time reduction state different from the time reduction final variation) (step 095AKS203; No), for effect control. The CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-variable display in the current variable display (step 095AKS208). Specifically, in step 095AKS208, the effect control CPU 101 is designated by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 31 by performing a random number lottery using the pseudo-variable display determination table shown in FIG. 18-13 (A). It is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo-variable display according to the fluctuation pattern.

In the pseudo-variable display determination table shown in FIG. 18-13 (A), the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command can be determined as the variation pattern of the variation display in the time-saving state different from the time-saving final variation PB1-1. Of ~ PB1-3, PA2-1 to PA2-3, and PA3-1 to PA3-3 (see FIG. 18-5 (B)), the variable pattern PB1-1 in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the variable display of the effect symbol. In the case of ~ PB1-3, PA2-1, PA3-1, it is determined that the pseudo-variable display is not executed (“not executed”) and the pseudo-variable display is executed at a higher rate (“executed”). It is configured to be. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command can be determined as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display in the time saving state different from the time saving final fluctuation. Fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-3, PA2-1 to PA2-3 , PA3-1 to PA3-3, in the case of the variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PA3-2, and PA3-3 in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol, the ratio is 100%. It is configured so that it is determined not to execute the pseudo-variable display and not determined to execute the pseudo-variable display. In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol, the pseudo variable display may be configured to be executable.

After returning to FIG. 18-11 and executing the process of step 095AKS208, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the pseudo variable display in step 095AKS208 (step 095AKS209). When it is determined that the pseudo-variable display is not executed (step 095AKS209; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo-variable display is to be executed (step 095AKS209; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is set to execute the pseudo-variable display, and the number of times the pseudo-variable display is executed in the current variable display is determined. The execution mode of the pseudo-variable display such as the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped at each pseudo-variable display is determined (step 095AKS210).

Specifically, in step 095AKS210, the effect control CPU 101 responds to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command by performing a random number lottery using the pseudo-variable display number determination table shown in FIG. 18-13 (B). Therefore, the number of times the pseudo-variable display is executed in the current variable display is determined. In the pseudo-variable display count determination table shown in FIG. 18-13 (B), when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is any of the variation patterns PB1-2 and PB1-3, the number of executions of the pseudo-variable display Is determined once and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern PB1-1, the number of executions of the pseudo-variable display is determined twice, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is In the case of any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 and PA3-1, the number of executions of the pseudo-variable display is determined to be 10. Further, in step 095AKS210, the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped in each pseudo-variable display is determined based on the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and the like. ..

After returning to FIG. 18-11 and executing the process of step 095AKS210, the process shifts to step 095AKS218.

When it is determined in step 095AKS201 that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the on state (not controlled to the time saving state) (step 095AKS211), the effect control CPU 101 is provided with an effect symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 103. By determining whether or not the non-display flag is set to the on state, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol is controlled to be in the non-display state (step 095AKS211). The effect symbol non-display flag is a flag indicating whether or not the effect symbol is not displayed, and is set to the on state when the effect symbol is not displayed, while the effect symbol is not displayed. It is set to the off state when it is not controlled by.

If it is determined in step 095AKS211 that the effect symbol non-display flag is not set to the on state (not controlled to the effect symbol non-display state) (step 095AKS211; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is set to the on state (controlled to the effect symbol non-display state) (step 095AKS211; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 has the hit hold waiting flag set. By determining whether or not it is set to the ON state, it is determined whether or not the setting of the hit hold standby is performed (step 095AKS212).

As will be described later, when the hit hold standby setting is made when the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation (step 095AKS207), the hit hold standby effect is executed in the time saving final fluctuation (step 095AKS305). , It is controlled to hide the effect symbol (step 095AKS304). On the other hand, when the time saving final fluctuation is a losing fluctuation and the setting of waiting for hold is not performed (step 095AKS206; No), the result effect at the time of losing is executed in the time saving final fluctuation (step 095AKS326). , It is controlled to hide the effect symbol (step 095AKS325). With such a configuration, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit hold standby flag is set to the on state when the effect symbol non-display flag is set to the on state. It is possible to determine which of the hold standby effect and the result effect at the time of loss is being executed.

In step 095AKS212, when it is determined that the hit hold standby flag is not set to the ON state (result effect at the time of loss is being executed) (step 095AKS212; No), the effect control CPU 101 is placed in a predetermined area of RAM 103. It is updated by subtracting 1 from the lost hold residual count value, which is the stored value of the provided lost hold residual counter (step 095AKS213). The loss hold residual number counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of loss fluctuations corresponding to the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state. After executing the process of step 095AKS213, the process shifts to step 095AKS218.

In step 095AKS212, when it is determined that the hit hold standby flag is set to the ON state (the hit hold standby effect is being executed) (step 095AKS212; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 uses the display result specification command. Based on the display result of the designated special symbol and the like, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display this time is a "hit" (step 095AKS214). When it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display this time is not "hit" (step 095AKS214; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display this time is "hit" (step 095AKS214; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is hit by clearing the hit hold standby flag and setting it to the off state. After erasing the setting during hold standby (step 095AKS215) and controlling to end the hit hold standby effect (step 095AKS216), the control to the effect symbol non-display state is ended, and the display of the effect symbol is resumed. Along with setting the normal return of the symbol display, the effect symbol non-display flag is cleared and set to the off state (step 095AKS217). With such a configuration, the hit hold standby effect ends and the display of the effect symbol is resumed in response to the start of the hit variation corresponding to the second hold storage portion at the end of the time saving state. After executing the process of step 095AKS217, the process shifts to step 095AKS218.

In step 095AKS218, the effect control CPU 101 determines a final effect symbol or the like to be the final stop symbol of the effect symbol (step 095AKS218). The final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol, can be determined based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command and the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command. The variable display content corresponding to the display result of the fluctuation pattern or the special symbol may include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", and "hit". For example, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a non-reach fluctuation pattern among the loss fluctuation patterns, the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)". Further, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is the reach fluctuation pattern among the loss fluctuation patterns, the variable display content is "reach (loss)". On the other hand, when a "hit" such as a big hit or a small hit is specified as the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result specification command, the variable display content becomes the "hit".

The final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol, is determined so that the left symbol and the right symbol are different and inconsistent effect symbols when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)". The final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol, is determined so that the left symbol and the right symbol are the same and match when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". The final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol of the effect symbol, is determined so that the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are the same and match when the variable display content is "hit". In addition, when the variable display content is "hit", the finalized effect symbol may be configured so that the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol match with the effect symbol according to the hit type.

After executing the process of step 095AKS218, the effect control CPU 101 determines a small symbol corresponding to the final effect symbol determined in step 095AKS218 as the final stop symbol of the small symbol (step 095AKS219). For example, in step 095AKS219, the same small symbol as the finalized effect symbol determined in step 095AKS218 may be determined as the finalized small symbol.

After executing the process of step 095AKS219, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit hold standby flag is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether or not the hit hold wait setting is made. Determine (step 095AKS220). When it is determined that the hit hold standby flag is set to the ON state (the hit hold wait setting is performed) (step 095AKS220; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines the determination determined in step 095AKS219. Among the small symbols, the small symbol that is the middle symbol is changed to a special symbol indicating the letter V (step 095AKS221). After executing the process of step 095AKS221, the process shifts to step 095AKS219. With such a configuration, the setting of the hit hold standby is set in response to the fact that the time saving final fluctuation is the loss fluctuation and the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state includes the hit hold (step 095AKS206; Yes). When this is performed (step 095AKS207), in the final variation of the time saving and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage at the end of the time saving state until the hit variation, the variable display of the small symbol results in a special display result. The confirmed small symbol is stopped and displayed.

If it is determined in step 095AKS220 that the hit hold standby flag is not set to the ON state (the hit hold wait setting is not set) (step 095AKS220; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS222. With such a configuration, the setting of the hit hold standby is set in response to the fact that the time saving final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation and the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state does not include the hit hold (step 095AKS206; No). If it is not performed, the final variation of the time saving and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state are the variable display of the small symbol, and the fixed small symbol (loss) determined in step 095AKS219 is displayed. Small symbol) is stopped and displayed.

In step 095AKS222, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step 095AKS222). The effect control pattern may include control data for controlling the effect by various effect devices according to the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the effect symbol during the variable display of the effect symbol.

In step 095AKS222, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and uses the pattern. Set as. Further, in step 095AKS222, a plurality of effect control CPU 101s are prepared in response to the execution setting of the time-saving final variation effect in the time-saving final variation effect determination process of step 095AKS204, the determination of the time-saving final variation effect pattern described later, and the like. Select one of the effect control patterns (time saving final variation effect control pattern) and set it as the pattern to be used. Further, in step 095AKS219, the effect control CPU 101 prepares a plurality of effect control patterns (super) in response to the execution setting of the super reach suggestion effect in the time reduction final variation effect determination process, the determination of the time reduction final variation effect pattern, and the like. Select one of the reach suggestion effect control patterns) and set it as the usage pattern. Further, in step 095AKS219, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (countdown effect control pattern) in response to the execution setting of the countdown effect in the time saving final variation effect determination process. Set as a usage pattern. Further, in step 095AKS219, the effect control CPU 101 prepares a plurality of effect control patterns in response to the determination of the time-saving final variation effect pattern in the time-saving final variation effect determination process, the execution setting of the pseudo-variable display in step 095AKS210, and the like. Select one of (pseudo-variable display effect control pattern) and set it as the pattern to be used. The special figure fluctuation effect control pattern, the time saving final variation effect control pattern, the super reach suggestion effect control pattern, the countdown effect control pattern, and the pseudo-variable display effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set. One effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect may be set.

After executing the process of step 095AKS222, the effect control CPU 101 sets an initial value of the effect control process timer corresponding to the variation pattern specified by, for example, the variation pattern command (step 095AKS223), and screens the effect display device 9. In the above, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the effect symbol and the like is made (step 095AKS224). In step 095AKS224, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effects are produced by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in step 095AKS222 to the VDP109. The variation of the effect symbol in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R and the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9K may be started. Further, in step 095AKS224, in the hold-related data storage unit (first hold-related data storage unit 095AKM01, second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02), for example, the hold-related data corresponding to the current fluctuation display is deleted, and the remaining hold-related data is held. The process of updating the stored contents may be performed by shifting the related data or the like. After executing the process of step 095AKS224, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change processing (step 095AKS225), and ends the effect symbol change start process.

FIG. 18-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 095AKS204 of the effect symbol variation start process as the time saving final variation effect determination process for the feature unit 095AK.

When the time-saving final variation effect determination process is started, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not to execute the time-saving final variation effect in the current variation display, which is the time-saving final variation (step 095AKS301). Specifically, in step 095AKS301, the effect control CPU 101 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving final variation effect determination table shown in FIGS. 18-15 to display a display result of a special symbol designated by the display result specification command. Depending on the variable display result of, it is determined whether or not to execute the time saving final variation effect.

In the time-saving final variation effect determination table shown in FIGS. 18-15, when the variable display result is "missing", the time-saving final variation effect is executed at a higher rate than it is determined to execute the time-saving final variation effect ("execution"). Is determined not to be executed ("No execution"), while if the variable display result is "hit", it is determined to execute the time saving final variation effect at a higher rate than it is determined not to execute the time saving final variation effect. It is configured to. With such a configuration, when the time-saving final variation effect is executed, the hit expectation is higher than when the time-saving final variation effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time saving final variation effect is executed, and to improve the game interest.

After returning to FIG. 18-14 and executing the process of step 095AKS301, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined in step 095AKS301 to execute the time saving final variation effect (step 095AKS302). When it is determined that the time saving final variation effect is not executed (step 095AKS302; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS314. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving final variation effect is to be executed (step 095AKS302; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 enters the battle mode by determining whether or not the battle mode flag is set to the ON state. It is determined whether or not it is controlled (step 095AKS303).

When it is determined that the battle mode flag is set to the ON state (controlled to the battle mode) (step 095AKS303; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is stored in, for example, the second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02. By checking the hold-related data, etc., the change display (the change) this time and the change display corresponding to the second hold storage as the change display corresponding to the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state (hold change). And, it is determined whether or not the hit variation in which the hit type is the second special figure big hit Y or the big hit B via the small hit is included (step 095AKS304). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage do not include the hit fluctuation in which the hit type is the second special figure jackpot Y or the jackpot B via the small hit ( Step 095AKS304; No), the effect control CPU 101 confirms the hold-related data stored in the second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02, for example, to display the current variation and the variation corresponding to the second hold storage. It is determined whether or not the hit variation is included twice or more in the display (step 095AKS305).

In step 095AKS304, it is assumed that the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion include the hit fluctuation in which the hit type is the second special figure jackpot Y or the jackpot via small hit B. When it is determined (step 095AKS304; Yes), or when it is determined in step 095AKS305 that the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage include the hit variation twice or more. (Step 095AKS305; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is set to execute a successful battle effect as a time-saving final variation effect (step 095AKS306). After executing the process of step 095AKS306, the process shifts to step 095AKS314.

In step 095AKS305, when it is determined that the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion do not include the hit fluctuation twice or more (step 095AKS305; No), the effect control CPU 101 Determines whether or not the hit fluctuation is included once in the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion (step 095AKS307). When it is determined that the hit variation is not included in the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion (step 095AKS307; No), the effect control CPU 101 is used as the time-saving final variation effect. A setting is made to execute the failed battle effect (step 095AKS308), and the process proceeds to step 095AKS314. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion include the hit fluctuation once (step 095AKS307; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 shortens the time. A setting is made to execute the relief effect as the final variation effect (step 095AKS309), and the process proceeds to step 095AKS314.

In step 095AKS303, when it is determined that the battle mode flag is not set to the ON state (controlled to the symbol fanning mode) (step 095AKS303; No), the effect control CPU 101 displays the fluctuation of this time and the second It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display corresponding to the reserved storage portion and the hit fluctuation are included one or more times (step 095AKS310). When it is determined that the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage include the hit variation at least once (step 095AKS310; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is finally shortened in time. A setting is made to execute a successful symbol effect as a variable effect (step 095AKS311). In step 095AKS311, a hit combination effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in the success symbol effect is determined. In the present embodiment, in step 095AKS311 the effect symbol of the hit combination corresponding to the effect symbol determined as the final effect symbol in step 095AKS218 of the effect symbol variation start processing is temporarily stopped in the successful symbol effect. Is determined as. Specifically, when the effect symbol of the hit combination is determined as the final effect symbol in step 095AKS218, the effect symbol of the hit combination is determined as the effect symbol temporarily stopped in the success symbol effect. On the other hand, when the effect symbol of the reach loss combination is determined as the final effect symbol in step 095AKS218, the effect of the hit combination in which the middle symbol of the effect symbol of the reach loss combination is changed to the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol. The symbol is determined as an effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in the successful symbol effect.

In step 095AKS310, when it is determined that the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage do not include the hit variation (step 095AKS310; No), the effect control CPU 101 shortens the time. A setting is made to execute a failed symbol effect as the final variation effect (step 095AKS312). In step 095AKS312, the effect symbol of the reach loss combination that is temporarily stopped by the failed symbol effect is determined. In the present embodiment, in step 095AKS312, the effect symbol of the reach loss combination corresponding to the effect symbol determined as the final effect symbol in step 095AKS218 of the effect symbol variation start processing is temporarily stopped by the failed symbol effect. Is determined as. Specifically, when the effect symbol of the reach loss combination is determined as the final effect symbol in step 095AKS218, the effect symbol of the reach loss combination is determined as the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in the failure symbol effect. On the other hand, when the effect symbol of the hit combination is determined as the final effect symbol in step 095AKS218, the effect symbol of the reach loss combination in which the middle symbol of the effect symbol of the hit combination is changed to the effect symbol determined by the random number lottery , It is determined as a production symbol that is temporarily stopped in the failure symbol production.

After executing the processes of step 095AKS311 and step 095AKS312, the effect control CPU 101 sets to execute the countdown effect (step 095AKS313). When the setting to execute the successful symbol effect is made in step 095AKS311, the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the current variation display, which is the final time saving variation, in step 095AKS313, and the successful symbol effect is started. It suffices if the setting to end the countdown effect is made in response to the change. Further, when the setting to execute the failed symbol effect is set in step 095AKS312, the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the current variation display, which is the time saving final variation, in step 095AKS313, and the current variation. A setting may be made to end the countdown effect in response to the end of the display. After executing the process of step 095AKS313, the process shifts to step 095AKS314.

In step 095AKS314, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the super reach suggestion effect in the current variation display, which is the time-saving final variation (step 095AKS314). Specifically, in step 095AKS314, the effect control CPU 101 performs a random number lottery using the super reach suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 18-16, thereby performing either a symbol fanning mode or a battle mode. Whether or not to execute the super reach suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the super reach suggestion effect is executed. Which of the effect mode, the symbol fan mode or the battle mode, is controlled may be specified based on whether or not the battle mode flag is set to the ON state.

In the super reach suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 18-16, when the battle mode is controlled, the super reach suggestion effect is executed at a lower rate than when the symbol fan mode is controlled (“executed”). It is configured to be determined. As described above, the super reach effect executed when controlled in the battle mode is more important to the player than the super reach effect executed when controlled in the symbol fanning mode. For this reason, when the battle mode is controlled, after the Gase Super Reach suggestion effect is executed, if the time saving final fluctuation ends without executing the Super Reach effect, when the pattern fanning mode is controlled. In addition, after the Gase Super Reach suggestion effect is executed, the player's disappointment is greater than when the time saving final fluctuation is completed without executing the Super Reach effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the battle mode, it is controlled to the battle mode by deciding to execute the super reach suggestion effect at a lower rate than when it is controlled to the symbol fanning mode. , It is configured so that the rate at which the Gase Super Reach suggestion effect is executed is lower than when it is controlled in the symbol fanning mode. According to such a configuration, the disappointment of the player can be suppressed, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

After returning to FIG. 18-14 and executing the process of step 095AKS314, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined in step 095AKS314 to execute the super reach suggestion effect (step 095AKS315). When it is determined that the super reach suggestion effect is not executed (step 095AKS315; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS319. On the other hand, when it is determined that the super reach suggestion effect is to be executed (step 095AKS315; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 enters the battle mode by determining whether or not the battle mode flag is set to the ON state. It is determined whether or not it is controlled (step 095AKS316).

When it is determined that the battle mode flag is set to the on state (controlled in battle mode) (step 095AKS316; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is set to execute the ally character appearance effect as a super reach suggestion effect. (Step 095AKS317), and the process proceeds to step 095AKS319. On the other hand, when it is determined that the battle mode flag is not set to the ON state (controlled to the symbol fanning mode) (step 095AKS316; No), the effect control CPU 101 executes the tempai fanning effect as a super reach suggestion effect. (Step 095AKS318), and the process proceeds to step 095AKS319. In step 095AKS318, the effect symbol temporarily stopped in the "left" effect symbol display area 9L in the tempai tenpai effect (the effect symbol that repeats the operation of approaching and leaving the "right" effect symbol display area 9R in the tempai tenpai effect). ) Is determined. In the present embodiment, in step 095AKS318, it corresponds to the effect symbol temporarily stopped by the success symbol effect determined in step 095AKS311 and the effect symbol temporarily stopped by the failure symbol effect determined in step 095AKS312. Then, in the tempai fanning effect, the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display area 9L of the "left" is determined. Specifically, in step 095AKS318, the left symbol of the effect symbol determined in step 095AKS311 or step 095AKS312 is determined as the effect symbol temporarily stopped in the "left" effect symbol display area 9L in the tempai fanning effect. ..

In addition, in the state of being controlled to the symbol fanning mode (the battle mode flag is set to the off state), it is determined in step 095AKS301 that the time saving final variation effect is not executed, and the super reach is suggested in step 095AKS314. When it is decided to execute the effect, in step 095AKS318, a setting for executing the tempai fanning effect as a Gase super reach suggestion effect may be made. Specifically, in this case, in step 095AKS318, after the production symbol is temporarily stopped in the production symbol display area 9L on the "left" as the tempai fanning production which is the Gase super reach suggestion production, the same production as the production symbol is produced. After repeating the operation of moving closer to and away from the effect symbol display area 9R where the symbol is "right", the effect symbol different from the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display area 9R of "right" and the effect symbol is not. It suffices if the setting is made to execute the effect of being temporarily stopped in the reach mode.

In step 095AKS319, the effect control CPU 101 determines the time saving final variation effect pattern to one of a plurality of prepared patterns according to the determination results of steps 095AKS301 to step 095AKS318 (step 095AKS319), and the time saving final variation effect. The decision process ends. The time-saving final variation effect pattern may include data for designating the effect contents such as the execution timing and the number of executions of various effects during the time-saving final variation. In the time saving final variation effect determination process, the execution timing and the number of executions of various effects are determined by determining the time saving final variation effect pattern in step 095AKS319.

FIG. 18-17 shows a configuration example of a time-saving final variation effect pattern with respect to the feature portion 095AK. The plurality of time-saving final variation effect patterns shown in FIGS. 18-17 have different execution timings and execution times of various effects. Note that FIG. 18-17 shows only a part of the plurality of time-saving final variation effect patterns prepared in advance, and the other time-saving final variation effect patterns are not shown.

FIG. 18-18 shows an example of determining the time saving final variation effect pattern according to the presence / absence and type of the time saving final variation effect during the time saving final variation with respect to the feature unit 095AK. In the feature unit 095AK, there are cases where a success symbol production or a success battle effect is executed as a time-saving final variation effect, a case where a failure symbol effect or a failure battle effect is executed as a time-saving final variation effect, and a relief effect as a time-saving final variation effect. The setting of the determinable pattern is different depending on whether the time saving final fluctuation effect is executed or the time saving final fluctuation effect is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 18-18 (A), in the decision example 095AKF01 when the success symbol effect or the success battle effect is executed as the time saving final variation effect, when the super reach suggestion effect is executed (“execution available”). , Production patterns CAD1-1 to CAD1-3 are included in the determinable patterns. In the effect pattern CAD1-1, in the time saving final fluctuation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed twice, the genuine super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo variable display is executed, and the genuine super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which the time-saving final variation effect (successful symbol effect or success battle effect) is executed from the end of the effect to the end of the time-saving final variation. In the effect pattern CAD1-2, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 16 times in the time saving final fluctuation, the genuine super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the 17th pseudo variable display is executed, and the genuine super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which the time-saving final variation effect (successful symbol effect or success battle effect) is executed from the end of the effect to the end of the time-saving final variation. In the effect pattern CAD1-3, in the time saving final fluctuation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 34 times, the genuine super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the 35th pseudo variable display is executed, and the genuine super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which the time-saving final variation effect (successful symbol effect or success battle effect) is executed from the end of the effect to the end of the time-saving final variation. In the determination example 095AKF01, when the super reach suggestion effect is not executed (“not executed”), the effect pattern CAD1-4 is included in the decidable pattern. The effect pattern CAD1-4 corresponds to the time-saving final variation effect (successful symbol effect or success battle effect) being started and the time-saving final variation ending after the pseudo-variable display is executed 35 times in the time-saving final variation. This is an effect pattern in which the final variation effect in a short time is completed.

As shown in FIG. 18-18 (B), in the determination example 095AKF02 when the failed symbol effect or the failed battle effect is executed as the time saving final variation effect, when the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the effect pattern CAD2-1 ~ CAD2-3 are included in the determinable pattern. In the effect pattern CAD2-1, the genuine super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the pseudo variable display is executed twice and then the third pseudo variable display is executed in the time saving final fluctuation, and the genuine super reach suggestion is performed. The time-saving final variation effect (failed symbol effect or failure battle effect) is executed from the end of the effect until the predetermined effect period elapses, and after the time-saving final variation effect is completed, the pseudo-variable display is executed 32 times. This is a production pattern in which the final variation in time reduction ends. In the effect pattern CAD2-2, in the time saving final fluctuation, after the pseudo variable display is executed 16 times, the genuine super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the 17th pseudo variable display is executed, and the genuine super reach suggestion is performed. The time-saving final variation effect (failed symbol effect or failure battle effect) is executed from the end of the effect until the predetermined effect period elapses, and after the time-saving final variation effect is completed, the pseudo-variable display is executed 18 times. This is a production pattern in which the final variation in time reduction ends. In the effect pattern CAD2-3, in the time saving final fluctuation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 34 times, the genuine super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the 35th pseudo variable display is executed, and the genuine super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which a time-saving final variation effect (failed symbol effect or failed battle effect) is executed in response to the end of the effect. In the determination example 095AKF02, when the super reach suggestion effect is not executed, the effect pattern CAD2-4 is included in the decidable pattern. The effect pattern CAD2-4 is an effect pattern in which the pseudo-variable display is executed 35 times in the time-saving final variation, and then the time-saving final variation effect (failed symbol effect or failed battle effect) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 18-18 (C), in the determination example 095AKF03 when the relief effect is executed as the time saving final variation effect, when the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the effect patterns CAD3-1 to CAD3-3 are used. , Included in the determinable pattern. In the effect pattern CAD3-1, in the time saving final fluctuation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed twice, the Gase super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo variable display is executed, and the Gase super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which the time-saving final variation effect (relief effect) is executed from the end of the effect to the end of the time-saving final variation. In the effect pattern CAD3-2, in the time saving final variation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 16 times, the Gase super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the 17th pseudo variable display is executed, and the Gase super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which the time-saving final variation effect (relief effect) is executed from the end of the effect to the end of the time-saving final variation. In the effect pattern CAD3-3, in the time saving final variation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 34 times, the Gase super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the 35th pseudo variable display is executed, and the Gase super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which the time-saving final variation effect (relief effect) is executed from the end of the effect to the end of the time-saving final variation. In the determination example 095AKF03, when the super reach suggestion effect is not executed, the effect pattern CAD3-4 is included in the decidable pattern. In the effect pattern CAD3-4, in the time-saving final variation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 35 times, the time-saving final variation effect (relief effect) is started, and the time-saving final variation effect is completed. Is a production pattern that ends.

As shown in FIG. 18-18 (D), in the determination example 095AKF04 when the time saving final variation effect is not executed, when the super reach suggestion effect is executed, the effect patterns CAD4-1 to CAD4-3 can be determined. Included in. In the effect pattern CAD4-1, in the time saving final fluctuation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed twice, the Gase super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo variable display is executed, and the Gase super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which the pseudo-variable display is executed 32 times after the effect is completed, and then the time-saving final variation ends. In the effect pattern CAD4-2, in the time saving final variation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 16 times, the Gase super reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the 17th pseudo variable display is executed, and the Gase super reach suggestion is performed. This is an effect pattern in which the pseudo-variable display is executed 18 times after the effect is completed, and then the time-saving final variation ends. In the effect pattern CAD4-3, in the time-saving final variation, after the pseudo-variable display is executed 34 times, the time-saving final variation is executed after the Gase Super Reach suggestion effect is executed during the period when the 35th pseudo-variable display is executed. It is a production pattern that ends. In the determination example 095AKF04, when the super reach suggestion effect is not executed, the effect pattern CAD4-4 is included in the determinable pattern. The effect pattern CAD4-4 is an effect pattern in which the pseudo-variable display is executed 35 times in the time-saving final variation, and then the time-saving final variation ends.

FIG. 18-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S802 of the effect control process process as the process during the effect symbol change with respect to the feature unit 095AK.

When the effect symbol changing process is started, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the effect symbol non-display flag is set to the ON state, and thus whether or not the effect symbol is controlled to the non-display state. Is determined (step 095AKS401). When it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is set to the on state (controlled to the effect symbol non-display state) (step 095AKS401; Yes), the process proceeds to step 095AKS406.

When it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is not set to the on state (the effect symbol is not controlled to the non-display state) (step 095AKS401; No), the effect control CPU 101 has the hit hold waiting flag turned on. By determining whether or not the flag is set to, it is determined whether or not the setting for waiting for a hit is made (step 095AKS402). When it is determined that the hit hold waiting flag is not set to the on state (the hit hold wait setting is not performed) (step 095AKS402; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS406.

When it is determined that the hit hold standby flag is set to the ON state (the hit hold wait setting is made) (step 095AKS402; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is, for example, a timer of the effect control process timer. Based on the value and the like, it is determined whether or not it is the predetermined start timing at which the hit hold standby effect is started (step 095AKS403). In the present embodiment, a timing prior to the end of the time reduction final variation (1 second in the present embodiment) is preset as the start timing of the hit hold standby effect. If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the hit hold standby effect (step 095AKS403; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS406.

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the hit hold standby effect (step 095AKS403; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 starts the control to the effect symbol non-display state and sets the effect symbol non-display flag to the on state (step 095AKS403; Yes). Step 095AKS404), control is performed to start the hit hold standby effect (step 095AKS405). After executing the process of step 095AKS405, the process shifts to step 095AKS406.

In step 095AKS406, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step 095AKS406). In step 095AKS406, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer.

When it is determined in step 095AKS406 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 095AKS406; No), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the pseudo-variable display period in which the pseudo-variable display is executed (step 095AKS406). 095AKS407). The pseudo-variable display period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (pseudo-variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS222 of the effect symbol variation start process. When it is determined that the pseudo-variable display period is reached (step 095AKS407; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 controls to execute the pseudo-variable display (step 095AKS408).

After executing the process of step 095AKS408, or when it is determined in step 095AKS407 that it is not the pseudo-variable display period (step 095AKS407; No), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed. (Step 095AKS409). The countdown effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (countdown effect control pattern) determined in step AKS222. When it is determined that the countdown effect period is reached (step 095AKS409; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 controls to execute the countdown effect (step 095AKS410).

After executing the process of step 095AKS410, or when it is determined in step 095AKS409 that it is not the countdown effect period (step 095AKS409; No), the effect control CPU 101 is in the time-saving final variation effect period when the time-saving final variation effect is executed. It is determined whether or not there is (step 095AKS411). The time-saving final variation effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time-saving final variation effect control pattern) determined in step AKS222. When it is determined that the time reduction final variation effect period is reached (step 095AKS411; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 controls to execute the time reduction final variation effect (step 095AKS412).

After executing the process of step 095AKS412, or when it is determined in step 095AKS411 that it is not the time saving final variation effect period (step 095AKS411; No), the effect control CPU 101 performs the super reach suggestion effect. It is determined whether or not it is a period (step 095AKS413). The super reach suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (super reach suggestion effect control pattern) determined in step AKS222. When it is determined that the super reach suggestion effect period is reached (step 095AKS413; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 controls to execute the super reach suggestion effect (step 095AKS414).

After executing the process of step 095AKS414, or when it is determined in step 095AKS413 that it is not the super reach suggestion effect period (step 095AKS413; No), the effect control CPU 101 executes other effect control (step 095AKS415). Ends the processing during the change of the effect symbol. In step 095AKS415, control for executing the normal reach effect, control for executing the pseudo continuous effect, and the like may be performed according to the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 095AKS222. Further, in step 095AKS415, it is sufficient that the control for executing the right-handed promotion notification is performed in response to the control in the time saving state. Further, in step 095AKS415, in response to the control in the time saving state, the control for executing the mode notification for notifying the player which of the symbol fanning mode and the battle mode is controlled. Should be done.

When it is determined in step 095AKS406 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 095AKS406; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step 095AKS416). ). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has not been received (step 095AKS416; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process during the effect symbol change. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is performed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation designation command. It may be executed.

When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step 095AKS416; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 changes the effect symbol as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, transmitting a display control command to the VDP 109. In addition to deriving the finalized effect symbol determined in step 095AKS218 of the start process, as a result of displaying the variable display of the small symbol, the finalized small symbol determined in step 095AKS219 of the effect symbol variation start process and the effect symbol variation start process Display control for deriving the changed small symbol in step 095AKS221 is performed (step 095AKS417). When the finalized effect symbol is derived while the effect symbol is not displayed, the finalized effect symbol is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 although the control for deriving the finalized effect symbol is internally performed. Do not show.

After executing the process of step 095AKS417, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined fixed time as a waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 095AKS418), and sets the value of the effect control process flag to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process. Update to the value corresponding to (step 095AKS419). After executing the process of step 095AKS419, the process shifts to step 095AKS420.

Moving to FIG. 18-20, in step 095AKS420, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is controlled to the time saving state ( Step 095AKS420). When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is set to the on state (controlled to the time saving state) (step 095AKS420; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 has a sub-side time saving count value of "0". By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the time-saving final variation (step 095AKS421).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is not "0" (the current variation display is a variation display in a time reduction state different from the time reduction final variation) (step 095AKS421; No), the effect control CPU 101 may be, for example. Based on the display result of the special symbol specified by the display result designation command, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display this time is a "big hit" (step 095AKS422). When it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display this time is not a "big hit" (step 095AKS422; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process during the effect symbol change. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display this time is a "big hit" (step 095AKS422; Yes), the process proceeds to step 095AKS428.

When it is determined in step 095AKS421 that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (the current variation display is the time reduction final variation) (step 095AKS421; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 is, for example, a display result designation command. Based on the display result of the special symbol specified in (step 095AKS423), it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the current variation display, which is the final variation in time reduction, is "missing" (step 095AKS423). When it is determined that the variable display result of the variable display this time is not "missing" (step 095AKS423; No), the process proceeds to step 095AKS428.

In step 095AKS423, when it is determined that the variable display result of the current fluctuation display, which is the final time saving variation, is “missing” (step 095AKS423; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 sets the hit hold standby flag to the ON state. By determining whether or not the flag has been set, it is determined whether or not the setting for waiting for a hit is made (step 095AKS424). When it is determined that the hit hold waiting flag is set to the on state (the hit hold wait setting is made) (step 095AKS424; Yes), the process proceeds to step 095AKS428.

When it is determined that the hit hold standby flag is not set to the on state (the hit hold standby setting is not performed) (step 095AKS424; No), the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the effect symbol non-display state. At the same time as starting the control, the effect symbol non-display flag is set to the on state (step 095AKS425), and the control is performed to start the result effect at the time of loss (step 095AKS426). After executing the process of step 095AKS426, the effect control CPU 101 sets the lost hold residual number count value to the initial value corresponding to the current second hold storage number (step 095AKS427). For example, when the current second hold storage number is "4", the loss hold residual number count value is set to "4" in step 095AKS427. The current number of second hold storages may be specified, for example, by checking the storage contents of the second hold-related data storage unit 095AKM02. After executing the process of step 095AKS427, the process shifts to step 095AKS428.

In step 095AKS428, the effect control CPU 101 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 095AKS428), clears the sub-side time reduction counter, and sets the sub-side time reduction count value to "0". (Step 095AKS429). After executing the process of step 095AKS429, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the battle mode flag is set to the ON state (step 095AKS430). When it is determined that the battle mode flag is not set to the ON state (step 095AKS430; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process during the effect symbol change. On the other hand, when it is determined that the battle mode flag is set to the on state (step 095AKS430; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 clears the battle mode flag and sets it to the off state (step 095AKS431), and the effect symbol changes. End the middle process.

In step 095AKS420, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the on state (not controlled to the time saving state) (step 095AKS420; No), the effect control CPU 101 has the effect symbol non-display flag turned on. By determining whether or not it is set to, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the effect symbol non-display state (step 095AKS432). When it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is not set to the on state (the effect symbol is not controlled to the non-display state) (step 095AKS432; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process during the effect symbol change. ..

When it is determined that the effect symbol non-display flag is set to the on state (controlled to the effect symbol non-display state) (step 095AKS432; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 has the hit hold waiting flag turned on. By determining whether or not it is set to, it is determined whether or not the hit hold standby effect is being executed (step 095AKS433). When it is determined that the hit hold standby flag is set to the ON state (the hit hold wait effect is being executed) (step 095AKS433; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 ends the effect symbol changing process.

In step 095AKS433, when it is determined that the hit hold waiting flag is not set to the ON state (the result effect at the time of loss is being executed) (step 095AKS433; No), the effect control CPU 101 counts the remaining number of loss hold. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" (step 095AKS434). When it is determined that the loss hold residual number count value is not "0" (step 095AKS434; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process during the effect symbol change.

When it is determined that the loss hold residual number count value is "0" (step 095AKS434; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 controls to end the result effect at the time of loss (step 095AKS435), and returns the effect symbol display to normal. At the same time as making the setting, the effect symbol non-display flag is cleared and set to the off state (step 095AKS436), and the effect symbol changing process is terminated. With such a configuration, the result effect at the time of loss ends and the display of the effect symbol is resumed in response to the end of the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage portion at the end of the time saving state.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation related to the feature unit 095AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 18-21 to 18-27.

First, with reference to FIGS. 18-21 and 18-22, when the symbol fanning mode is controlled in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and the tempai fanning effect is executed as the gasse super reach suggestion effect in the time saving final fluctuation. An example of the production operation of Specifically, the case where the tempai fanning effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time-saving final variation will be described below as an example.

FIG. 18-21 (A) shows a loss combination (“127”) in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9 in the normal state. It shows a state in which the effect symbol is derived and the small symbol of the same loss combination is derived in the small symbol display area 9K. In FIG. 18-21 (B), variable display of the effect symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the small symbol is displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. Indicates that the variable display has started. In FIG. 18-21 (C), the effect symbols of the hit combination (“555”) are derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the small symbol display is performed. It shows a state in which small symbols of the same hit combination are derived in the area 9K. FIG. 18-21 (D) shows a state in which control to the jackpot gaming state has been started. In the state shown in FIG. 18-21 (D), in response to the start of control to the big hit game state, the right-handed promotion notification is started in the right-handed display area 9Z, and the fanfare effect is started. There is. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 18-21 (D), a big hit display is performed to notify the occurrence of a big hit by displaying the message "Big hit!" On the screen of the effect display device 9.

FIG. 18-21 (E) shows a state in which the jackpot end effect and the mode selection effect have been started. In the jackpot end effect, as shown in FIG. 18-21 (E), the message "big hit end" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, and it is notified that the control to the jackpot game state is completed. .. In the mode selection effect, as shown in FIG. 18-21 (E), the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, and either the pattern fanning mode or the battle mode is selected. There is an effect that encourages the player to make a choice. In the state shown in FIG. 18-21 (E), the symbol fanning mode is selected, and the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the symbol fanning mode is selected. Hereinafter, in the state where the symbol fanning mode is selected, the jackpot end effect and the mode selection effect are ended in response to the end of the jackpot end effect period, and the effect mode controlled in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state is the symbol. The case where the fan mode is determined will be described as an example.

In FIG. 18-21 (F), in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the first pseudo-variable display during the time saving final fluctuation is started in response to the start of the time saving final fluctuation, and “left”, Indicates a state in which the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display area 9K. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 18-21 (F), the countdown effect is started in response to the start of the time reduction final variation, and the remaining time until the end of the time reduction final variation is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The message "140 seconds remaining" is displayed as a countdown display indicating that the time is 140 seconds. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 18-21 (F), right-handed promotion notification is performed and mode notification is performed in the right-handed display area 9Z corresponding to the time reduction state. By displaying the message "design fanning mode" on the screen of the effect display device 9, it is notified that the design fanning mode is controlled.

FIG. 18-21 (G) shows a loss combination (“Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the first pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation. 135 ") shows the state in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped. In FIG. 18-21 (H), the second pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation is started, and the effect symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Indicates that the variable display has started. FIG. 18-21 (I) shows a loss combination (“Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the second pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation. 357 ”) shows a state in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped.

Moving to FIG. 18-22, in FIG. 18-22 (A), the third pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation is started, and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, It shows the state in which the variable display of the effect symbol is started in 9C and 9R. FIG. 18-22 (B) shows a state in which the tempai fanning effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display is being executed during the time reduction final fluctuation. In the tempai fanning effect shown in FIG. 18-22 (B), in the state where the effect symbol showing the number 7 is temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display area 9L of the "left", the effect symbol showing the number 7 is also ". By repeating the operation of moving closer to and away from the "right" effect symbol display area 9R, the effect symbols showing the number 7 are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R. It is suggested that the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (B), the effect symbol is variably displayed in the "middle" effect symbol display area 9C.

FIG. 18-22 (C) is a production symbol different from the production symbol showing the number 7 temporarily stopped in the production symbol display area 9L of the “left” in the tempai fanning production as the Gase Super Reach suggestion production. This indicates a state in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in a non-reach mode by temporarily stopping the effect symbol indicating the number in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (C), the effect symbol is variably displayed in the "middle" effect symbol display area 9C. FIG. 18-22 (D) shows the fourth time during the time reduction final fluctuation after the tenpai fanning effect as the Gase Super Reach suggestion effect is completed in response to the end of the third pseudo variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation. The pseudo-variable display of the effect symbol is started, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of "left", "middle", and "right".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-21 and 18-22, it is controlled to the symbol fanning mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and the true super reach is suggested in the time saving final fluctuation in which the variable display result becomes "big hit". An example of the effect operation when the success symbol effect is executed after the tempai fan effect is executed as the effect will be described. Specifically, the case where the tempai fanning effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time-saving final variation will be described below as an example.

In this case, after the effect operations shown in FIGS. 18-21 (A) to 18-21 (I), 18-22 (A), and 18-22 (B) are executed, 18-22 (E) ) Is executed. In FIG. 18-22 (E), in the successful symbol production, in the tempai fanning production shown in FIG. 18-22 (B), the operation of approaching and moving away from the “right” production symbol display area 9R was repeated, “left”. The effect symbol showing the number 7 which is the same effect symbol as the effect symbol temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display area 9L of "" is temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display area 9L of "right", so that the effect symbol Indicates a state of being temporarily stopped in the reach mode. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (E), the effect symbol is variably displayed in the "middle" effect symbol display area 9C. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (E), the countdown effect has ended in response to the start of the successful symbol effect, and the countdown display has been erased.

FIG. 18-22 (F) shows the effect symbols temporarily stopped in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R in the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (E) in the successful symbol production. By temporarily stopping the effect symbol showing the number 7 which is the same effect symbol in the effect symbol display area 9C of "middle", each effect symbol display area 9L of "left", "middle", and "right" , 9C, 9R indicate a state in which the effect symbols of the hit combination (“777”) are temporarily stopped. FIG. 18-22 (G) shows FIGS. 18-22 in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in response to the end of the time saving final fluctuation. It shows a state in which the effect symbols of the hit combination temporarily stopped in the successful symbol effect shown in (F) are derived, and the small symbols of the same hit combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-21 to 18-23, it is controlled to the symbol fanning mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and the genuine super reach is suggested in the time saving final fluctuation in which the variable display result becomes "missing". An example of the effect operation when the success symbol effect is executed after the tempai fanning effect is executed as the effect, and the hit hold standby effect is executed after the success symbol effect is executed will be described. Specifically, the case where the tempai fanning effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time-saving final variation will be described below as an example. More specifically, hereinafter, the time saving final fluctuation is the loss fluctuation, the first second holding memory of the second holding memory at the end of the time saving state is the losing hold, and the second second holding memory is the loss hold. The case where the variable display result is a hit hold corresponding to the variable display which is a “big hit” will be described as an example.

In this case, FIGS. 18-21 (A) to 18-21 (I), 18-22 (A), 18-22 (B), 18-22 (E), 18-22 (F). After the effect operation shown in FIG. 18-23 is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 18-23 (A) is executed. In FIG. 18-23 (A), in the state where the hit hold standby effect is executed and the effect symbol is not displayed, the small symbol display area 9K is set in response to the end of the time saving final variation. It shows a state in which a small symbol (“7V7”) that is a special display result including a special symbol indicating the letter V as a middle symbol is derived. In the hit hold standby effect shown in FIG. 18-23 (A), an effect image showing the hit hold standby character is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, and a message "End of symbol fanning mode" is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the control to the symbol fanning mode has ended. In the state shown in FIG. 18-23 (A), the right-handed promotion notification and the mode notification have ended in response to the end of the control to the time saving state.

In FIG. 18-23 (B), the loss fluctuation corresponding to the first second hold storage at the end of the time saving state, which is the loss hold, is started, and the small symbol is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. Indicates the state of FIG. 18-23 (C) shows a small symbol that is a special display result in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the end of the loss fluctuation corresponding to the first second hold storage at the end of the time saving state. ("4V6") shows the derived state.

FIG. 18-23 (D) shows a state in which the hit variation corresponding to the second second hold storage at the end of the time saving state, which is the hit hold, has started. In the state shown in FIG. 18-23 (D), the small symbol is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 9K, and the hit fluctuation corresponding to the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state is started. Corresponding to, the hit hold standby effect is finished, the control to the effect symbol non-display state is finished, and the display of the effect symbol is resumed, and each effect symbol display of "left", "middle", and "right" Variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. FIG. 18-23 (E) shows “left”, “middle”, and “right” corresponding to the end of the hit variation corresponding to the second second hold storage at the end of the time saving state which is the hit hold. In each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the effect symbols of the hit combination (“333”) are derived, and in the small hit display area 9K, the small symbols of the same hit combination are derived. ing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-21, 18-22, and 18-24, the time saving final variation is controlled to the symbol fanning mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and the variable display result becomes "missing". In the above, an example of an effect operation in which a failure symbol effect is executed after the tempai fanning effect is executed as a genuine super reach suggestion effect, and a result effect at the time of loss is executed after the failure symbol effect is executed will be described. Specifically, the case where the tempai fanning effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed among the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time-saving final variation will be described below as an example. More specifically, hereinafter, the case where the time saving final fluctuation is the losing fluctuation and all the second reserved storages (1st to 4th second holding storages) at the end of the time saving state are lost holdings will be used as an example. explain.

In this case, after the effect operations shown in FIGS. 18-21 (A) to 18-21 (I), 18-22 (A), and 18-22 (B) are executed, 18-22 (H) ) Is executed. In FIG. 18-22 (H), in the failed symbol production, in the tempai fanning effect shown in FIG. 18-22 (B), the operation of approaching and moving away from the “right” effect symbol display area 9R was repeated, “left”. The effect symbol showing the number 7 which is the same effect symbol as the effect symbol temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display area 9L of "" is temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display area 9L of "right", so that the effect symbol Indicates a state of being temporarily stopped in the reach mode. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (H), the effect symbol is variably displayed in the "middle" effect symbol display area 9C. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (H), the countdown effect is continuously performed.

18-22 (I) shows the effect symbols temporarily stopped in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R in the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (H) in the failed symbol effect. By temporarily stopping the effect symbols showing the numbers 6 which are different effect symbols in the effect symbol display area 9C of the "middle", each effect symbol display area 9L of "left", "middle", and "right", At 9C and 9R, the effect symbol of the reach loss combination (“767”) is temporarily stopped. In FIGS. 18-22 (J), after the failed symbol production is completed in response to the elapse of the predetermined production period, the fourth pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation is started, and “left” and “middle” are shown. "," Right "indicates the state in which the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R.

FIG. 18-22 (K) shows FIGS. 18-22 in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in response to the end of the time saving final variation. In the failed symbol effect shown in (I), the effect symbol of the reach loss combination temporarily stopped is derived, and the small symbol of the same reach loss combination is derived in the small symbol display area 9K. In the state shown in FIG. 18-22 (K), in the countdown effect, as a time-out display indicating that the remaining time until the end of the time-saving final fluctuation is 0 second, corresponding to the end of the time-saving final fluctuation. The message "0 seconds remaining" is displayed.

FIG. 18-24 (A) shows a state in which the result effect at the time of loss is started and is controlled to the effect symbol non-display state. In the result effect at the time of loss shown in FIG. 18-24 (A), it is notified on the screen of the effect display device 9 that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the end of the time saving state is 1334. The message "Total 1334pt" is displayed, and the message "End of symbol fanning mode" is displayed to notify that the control to the symbol fanning mode has ended. In the state shown in FIG. 18-24 (A), the countdown effect ends in response to the end of the time reduction final fluctuation, the countdown display is erased, and the control to the time reduction state ends. Right-handed promotion notification and mode notification have been completed.

In FIG. 18-24 (B), the loss fluctuation corresponding to the first second hold storage at the end of the time saving state, which is the loss hold, is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display area 9K. Shows the state. FIG. 18-24 (C) shows a loss combination (“334”) in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the end of the loss fluctuation corresponding to the first second hold storage at the end of the time saving state. It shows the state in which the small symbol of is derived. In FIG. 18-24 (D), the loss fluctuation corresponding to the second second hold storage at the end of the time saving state, which is the loss hold, is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display area 9K. Shows the state. FIG. 18-24 (E) shows a loss combination (“268”) in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the end of the loss fluctuation corresponding to the second second hold storage at the end of the time saving state. It shows the state in which the small symbol of is derived. In FIG. 18-24 (F), the loss fluctuation corresponding to the third second hold storage at the end of the time saving state, which is the loss hold, is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display area 9K. Shows the state. FIG. 18-24 (G) shows a loss combination (“145”) in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the end of the loss fluctuation corresponding to the third second hold storage at the end of the time saving state. It shows the state in which the small symbol of is derived. In FIG. 18-24 (H), the loss fluctuation corresponding to the fourth second hold storage at the end of the time saving state, which is the loss hold, is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display area 9K. Shows the state. FIG. 18-24 (I) shows a loss combination (“957”) in the small symbol display area 9K in response to the end of the loss fluctuation corresponding to the fourth second hold storage at the end of the time saving state. It shows the state in which the small symbol of is derived.

In FIG. 18-24 (J), the result effect at the time of loss ends in response to the end of the variation display of the second reserved memory at the end of the time saving state, and the control to the effect symbol non-display state ends. , "Left", "Middle", and "Right" indicate the state in which the display of the effect symbols is resumed in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. In the state shown in FIG. 18-24 (J), the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are the same as the small symbols derived in the small symbol display area 9K. The production design of the loss combination is derived.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-25 and 18-26, the battle mode is controlled in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and the ally character appearance effect is executed as the Gase super reach suggestion effect in the time saving final fluctuation. An example of the effect operation in the case will be described. Specifically, the case where the ally character appearance effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed out of the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time saving final fluctuation will be described below as an example. ..

FIG. 18-25 (A) shows a loss combination (“127”) in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9 in the normal state. It shows a state in which the effect symbol is derived and the small symbol of the same loss combination is derived in the small symbol display area 9K. In FIG. 18-25 (B), variable display of the effect symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the small symbol is displayed in the small symbol display area 9K. Indicates that the variable display has started. In FIG. 18-25 (C), the effect symbols of the hit combination (“555”) are derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the small symbol display is performed. It shows a state in which small symbols of the same hit combination are derived in the area 9K. FIG. 18-25 (D) shows a state in which the control to the big hit game state is started, the right-handed promotion notification is started in the right-handed display area 9Z, and the fanfare effect is started.

FIG. 18-25 (E) shows a state in which the jackpot end effect and the mode selection effect have been started. In the state shown in FIG. 18-25 (E), the symbol fanning mode is selected, and the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the symbol fanning mode is selected. Hereinafter, in the state where the symbol fanning mode shown in FIG. 18-25 (E) is selected, the battle mode shown in FIG. 18-25 (F) corresponds to the detection of the mode selection operation by the push button 120. The case where the control is performed in the selected state will be described as an example. In the state shown in FIG. 18-25 (F), the mode selection promotion image 095AK01 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the battle mode is selected. Hereinafter, in the state where the battle mode is selected, the big hit end effect and the mode selection effect are ended in response to the end of the big hit end effect period, and the effect mode controlled in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state is the battle mode. The case determined in is described as an example.

In FIG. 18-25 (G), in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the first pseudo-variable display during the time saving final fluctuation is started in response to the start of the time saving final fluctuation, and “left”, Indicates a state in which the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display area 9K. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 18-25 (G), the right-handed promotion notification is performed in the right-handed display area 9Z and the mode notification is performed in response to the control to the time saving state, and the effect display is performed. By displaying the message "battle mode" on the screen of the device 9, it is notified that the device 9 is controlled to the battle mode.

FIG. 18-25 (H) shows a loss combination (“left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the first pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation. 135 ") shows the state in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped. In FIG. 18-25 (I), the second pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation is started, and the effect symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Indicates that the variable display has started. FIG. 18-25 (J) shows a loss combination (“left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the second pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation. 357 ”) shows a state in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped.

Moving to FIGS. 18-26, in FIG. 18-26 (A), the third pseudo-variable display during the time-saving final fluctuation is started, and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, It shows the state in which the variable display of the effect symbol is started in 9C and 9R. FIG. 18-26 (B) shows a state in which the ally character appearance effect is executed during the period in which the third pseudo-variable display is being executed during the time reduction final fluctuation. In the ally character appearance effect, as shown in FIGS. 18-26 (B), a moving image showing the appearance of the ally character is reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. In the state shown in FIG. 18-26 (B), in the third pseudo-variable display, the combination of “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R is lost (“579”). ) Is temporarily stopped.

FIG. 18-26 (C) shows 4 in the final time reduction change after the end of the ally character appearance effect as the Gase Super Reach suggestion effect in response to the end of the third pseudo variable display during the time reduction final change. The second pseudo-variable display is started, and the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-25 and 18-26, the battle mode is controlled in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and the genuine super reach suggestion effect is produced in the time saving final fluctuation in which the variable display result becomes "big hit". An example of the production operation when the successful battle production is executed after the ally character appearance production is executed will be described. Specifically, the case where the ally character appearance effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed out of the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time saving final fluctuation will be described below as an example. ..

In this case, after the effect operations shown in FIGS. 18-25 (A) to 18-25 (J), 18-26 (A), and 18-26 (B) are executed, 18-26 (D) ) Is executed. FIG. 18-26 (D) shows a state in which a moving image showing a battle between a ally character and an enemy character is being reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. FIG. 18-26 (E) shows a state in which a moving image showing how a ally character wins over an enemy character is reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in a successful battle effect. .. FIG. 18-26 (F) shows a hit combination (“777”) in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in response to the end of the time saving final fluctuation. It shows a state in which the effect symbols of ") are derived and the small symbols of the same hit combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-25 to 18-27, the battle mode is controlled in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and the genuine super reach suggestion effect is produced in the time saving final fluctuation in which the variable display result becomes "missing". An example of the production operation when the failure battle production is executed after the ally character appearance production is executed will be described. Specifically, the case where the ally character appearance effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed out of the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time saving final fluctuation will be described below as an example. ..

In this case, the effect operations shown in FIGS. 18-25 (A) to 18-25 (J), 18-26 (A), 18-26 (B), and 18-26 (D) were executed. After that, the effect operation shown in FIG. 18-27 (A) is executed. FIG. 18-27 (A) shows a state in which a moving image showing how a ally character is defeated by an enemy character is reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. In FIGS. 18-27 (B), after the failed battle production is completed in response to the elapse of the predetermined production period, the fourth pseudo-variable display during the time reduction final fluctuation is started, and “left” and “middle” are shown. "," Right "indicates the state in which the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. In FIG. 18-27 (C), the reach loss combination (“767”) is shown in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” production symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in response to the end of the time saving final fluctuation. ”) Is derived, and the small symbol of the same reach loss combination is derived in the small symbol display area 9K.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18-25 to 18-27, the battle mode is controlled in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and the Gase Super Reach suggestion effect is produced in the time saving final fluctuation in which the variable display result becomes the “big hit”. An example of the effect operation when the relief effect is executed after the ally character appearance effect is executed will be described. Specifically, the case where the ally character appearance effect is executed during the period when the third pseudo-variable display is executed out of the plurality of pseudo-variable displays executed in the time saving final fluctuation will be described below as an example. ..

In this case, FIGS. 18-25 (A) to 18-25 (J), 18-26 (A), 18-26 (B), 18-26 (D), 18-27 (A). After the effect operation shown in FIG. 18-27 is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 18-27 (D) is executed. FIG. 18-27 (D) shows a state in which a moving image showing a state in which a relief character appears is reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the relief effect. FIG. 18-27 (E) shows a state in which, in the relief effect, a moving image showing how the ally character wins over the enemy character is reproduced and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. FIG. 18-27 (F) shows a hit combination (“777”) in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in response to the end of the time saving final fluctuation. It shows a state in which the effect symbols of ") are derived and the small symbols of the same hit combination are derived in the small symbol display area 9K.

As described above, in the feature unit 095AK, when the symbol fanning mode is controlled (controlled to the first effect state), the current variation display, the variation display corresponding to the second hold storage, and the variation display corresponding to the second hold storage are displayed. When it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state in at least one variation display, a success symbol effect as a super reach effect (specific effect) that displays a success result (specific effect result) is executed. It is configured to be possible. Further, in the feature unit 095AK, when the battle mode is controlled (controlled to the second production state), the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second hold storage are performed at least twice. When controlled to an advantageous state in the variable display of, it is configured to be able to execute a successful battle effect as a super reach effect that displays the success result. Further, in the feature unit 095AK, after being controlled to an advantageous state, the first state such as the second special figure big hit X or the after-hit control state of the small hit via big hit A and the second special figure big hit Y or the small hit via big hit B This time, when it is configured to be controllable to the second state, which is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the first state, such as the post-hit control state, and is controlled to the battle mode. The variable display and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage are controlled to an advantageous state at least once in the variable display, and after being controlled to the advantageous state, the second special figure jackpot Y or the second special figure jackpot Y or When controlled to the post-hit control state of the big hit B via the small hit, the successful battle effect can be executed. Further, in the feature unit 095AK, when the battle mode is controlled, the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second hold storage are controlled to an advantageous state in one fluctuation display, and this time. When the variation display and the variation display corresponding to the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variation display different from the one variation display, the effect is different from the super reach effect and is advantageous. It is configured to be able to execute a relief effect (special effect) that suggests that it is controlled by the state. Specifically, in the feature unit 095AK, when controlled to the battle mode, the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second hold storage are controlled to an advantageous state in one variation display. After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot X as the first state or the jackpot A via the small hit, and the fluctuation display of this time and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second hold storage. Of the above, when the variation display different from the one variation display is not controlled in an advantageous state, the relief effect can be executed. In addition, the feature unit 095AK is configured to be able to execute the super reach suggestion effect (suggestion effect) that suggests that the super reach effect is executed, and when it is controlled to the battle mode, it is set to the symbol fan mode. It is configured so that the super reach suggestion effect can be executed at a lower rate than when it is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the feature unit 095AK is configured to be able to execute an effect different from that when the control to the battle mode ends when the control to the symbol fanning mode ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In addition, the feature unit 095AK is configured to be controllable in either a symbol fanning mode or a battle mode, depending on the player's selection. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 095AK, when the symbol fanning mode is controlled, the super reach effect can be executed in the symbol fanning mode (first effect mode), and when the super reach effect is controlled to the battle mode. In addition, the super reach effect can be executed in a battle mode (second effect mode) different from the pattern fanning mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 095AK, the variable display of the second special symbol (second identification information) is controlled to the time saving state (specific state) in which the variable display is executed at a higher rate than the normal state, and the time saving final fluctuation (predetermined variable). When the display) is being executed, the super reach effect is configured to be executable, and when the time saving final fluctuation is being executed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is performed again. The super reach suggestion effect can be executed during the period when the display (special variable display) is executed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the post-hit control state of the second special figure big hit Y or the big hit B via the small hit is the second state. However, this is only an example, and the second state is an arbitrary state that is more likely to be controlled than the first state, such as the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot X or the jackpot A via the small hit. May be. Hereinafter, a modified example will be described in which the hit type includes a probability variation jackpot controlled to a probability variation state as the second state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 18-28 shows a hit type table for this modified example. In the hit type table shown in FIGS. 18-28, the hit types are the above-mentioned first special figure big hit X, first special figure big hit Y, second special figure big hit X, second special figure big hit Y, and big hit via small hit A. In addition to the big hit B via the small hit, the first special figure big hit Z, the second special figure big hit Z, and the big hit C via the small hit are provided. The first special symbol jackpot Z is a symbol jackpot that is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol jackpot Z is a symbol jackpot that is directly generated based on the variable display of the second special symbol. be. The first special figure jackpot Z and the second special figure jackpot Z are both jackpots in which the jackpot is opened eight times. The big hit C via the small hit is a big hit via the small hit generated by the V winning via the small hit based on the variation display of the second special symbol. The big hit C via the small hit is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) on condition that the V winning is opened after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times).

The first special figure jackpot Z, the second special figure jackpot Z, and the jackpot via small hit C are all jackpots that are controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and are called probabilistic jackpots. The probabilistic state is a state in which high-base control and time-saving control are performed, and probability-changing control is performed in which the probability that the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state and the time-saving state. The probabilistic state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The post-hit control state of the first special figure big hit Z, the second special figure big hit Z, and the big hit C via the small hit can continue the probabilistic state until the next big hit game state is started. When the post-hit control state is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is more likely to be controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state as compared with the case where the post-hit control state is controlled to the time saving state. That is, in this modified example, after the control to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state is completed, the first state is set to the time saving state as the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot X or the jackpot A via the small hit. It is a second state that is more likely to be controlled than the first state, such as a post-hit control state and a probability variation state as a post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot Z or jackpot C via small hit. It is configured to be controllable in the post-hit control state.

In the post-hit control state of the second special figure big hit Z or the big hit C via the small hit, the probabilistic state can be continued until the next big hit game state is started, and in the probable change state, the ratio is higher than that in the normal state and the time saving state. A big hit occurs. Therefore, when the player is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the second special figure jackpot Z or the jackpot C via the small hit, and is controlled to the probabilistic state as the post-hit control state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the player does not fire the game ball. Except in some cases, a big hit always occurs before the probable change state ends. Therefore, when the hit type is the second special figure big hit Z or the big hit C via the small hit, after being controlled to the big hit game state, it is changed to the big hit game state in the probability change state as the post-hit control state after the end of the big hit game state. By being controlled, it is substantially determined that the jackpot game state is controlled twice.

In this modified example, when the time saving final variation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, the variation display of this time and the variation display corresponding to the second hold storage currently stored are When the change display is controlled to the big hit game state of the second special figure big hit Z or the small hit game state in which the hit type at the time of V winning is the big hit C via the small hit, as a time saving final fluctuation effect. The successful battle effect may be configured to be executable. That is, when the time saving final fluctuation is executed in the state controlled in the battle mode, at least one fluctuation of the current fluctuation display and the fluctuation display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored is performed. When the display is controlled to an advantageous state, and after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the post-hit control state of the second special figure jackpot Z as the second state or the jackpot C via the small hit, as a time saving final variation effect. The successful battle effect may be configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, when the battle mode is controlled, by executing the successful battle effect, the variable display of this time and the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage currently stored can be displayed. , It is configured to be able to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state at least twice, or that it is substantially determined to be controlled to the advantageous state at least twice, and the game playability is different from the symbol fanning mode. Can be done.

In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that it is possible to control either the symbol fanning mode or the battle mode when the time is controlled to be shortened. However, this is only an example, and when it is controlled in the time saving state, it may be configured to be controllable to an effect mode different from any of the symbol fanning mode and the battle mode. For example, it is controlled to a production mode in which a production using a character that is not used for the production is executed when the time is controlled to the symbol fanning mode or a battle mode, or a symbol fanning mode or a battle mode. The BGM that is not output when the BGM is being output may be controllably configured in the effect mode that is output from the speaker 27.

In the above embodiment, during the jackpot end effect period in which the jackpot end effect for notifying the end of control to the jackpot game state is executed, any effect mode is controlled in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. Was explained as being selectable by the player. However, this is only an example, and the player can accept the selection of the effect mode at any timing. For example, during the period when the last round (final round) of a plurality of rounds (big hit games) executed in the big hit game state is executed, which effect mode is controlled in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state is controlled. The player may be able to select the Ruka. Specifically, the mode selection effect shown in the above embodiment is configured to be executable during the period during which the final round in the jackpot game state is being executed, and the push button 120 is executed when the mode selection effect is being executed. The effect mode may be configured to be selectable based on the detection of the mode selection operation.

In the above embodiment, when the mode selection effect is being executed, the effect mode can be selected based on the fact that the push button 120 as the operation means detects the pressing operation on the push button 120 as the mode selection operation. Explained as being. However, this is only an example, and the player can accept the selection of the effect mode by any method. For example, the stick controller 122 as an operation means capable of detecting the operation by the player is configured to be able to select the effect mode based on the detection of the operation of tilting the stick controller 122 toward the front as the mode selection operation. May be good.

Any part or all of each of the above configurations can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration relating to the feature portion 095AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the other feature portions such as the feature portion 89AK to the feature portion 92AK. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

For example, the feature unit 89AK may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 095AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 095AK, the specific variable display and the specific variable display are stored in the second hold storage buffer (hold storage means) when the specific variable display is executed. The variable display corresponding to the pending information, and the notice effect and the display result corresponding effect (specific notification) are configured to be executable, and the jackpot game state (advantageous state) is not controlled based on the specific variable display. When the specific hold information related to the variable display controlled by the jackpot game state is not stored in the second hold storage buffer, the advance notice effect and the display result corresponding effect for notifying that the specific variable display is not controlled to the jackpot game state. Is executed, and in the variable display based on the hold information stored in the second hold storage buffer after the specific variable display is completed, the final stop symbol (predetermined display result) of the loss combination is displayed as the display result of the small symbol (reduced identification information). May be configured so that it can be derived. In this case, in order to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled in the specific variable display when the specific hold information is stored in the second hold storage buffer without being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the specific variable display. In the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the second hold storage buffer after the notice effect and the display result corresponding effect are executed and the specific variable display is completed, the small symbol is lost as the display result. It is possible to derive a special display result composed of some small symbols that make up the final stop symbol of the combination and special identification information that is not included in the small symbols that make up the final stop symbol of the lost combination. In the variable display based on the hold information, it may be configured so that it can be notified that the jackpot game state is controlled in a mode different from the notice effect and the display result corresponding effect. Further, in this case, the jackpot gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state of the first special figure jackpot C (first advantageous state) and the jackpot gaming state of the first special figure jackpot C. Figure big hit A, 1st special figure big hit B, 2nd special figure big hit, big hit game state (second advantageous state) of big hit X to Z via small hit, 1st special figure big hit A, 1st special figure When the jackpot is controlled to any of the jackpot B, the second special figure jackpot, and the jackpot X to Z via the small hit, the effect of red 7 as the specific identification information is displayed as the display result of the effect symbol (identification information). A specific display result composed of only a symbol and a small symbol or a gold 7 effect symbol and a small symbol is derived, and a small symbol different from the special identification information constituting the special display result is a predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information. May be configured to include. With such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 095AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 095AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about the variable display that has not yet been executed as hold information, and
It is possible to display the effect result of a specific effect result (for example, a success result) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled and a predetermined effect result (for example, a failure result) for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-11, 18-14, 18-19, 18-20, FIG. 18-20, which can execute a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect). 18-22, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.)
The effect state control means (for example, FIG. 18) that can control the first effect state (for example, the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode) and the second effect state (for example, the state controlled in the battle mode). -6, Fig. 18-7, Fig. 18-9, Fig. 18-10, Fig. 18-14, Fig. 18-21, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-25 to Fig. 18-27, etc.)
With
The specific effect executing means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22, etc.).
The advantageous state in at least two variable displays of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the second effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, etc.).
When controlled to the second effect state, one of the variable display during execution and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. When the variable display controlled and being executed and the variable display stored by the hold storage means are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display different from the one variable display, the effect different from the specific effect. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-, which are special effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18- 27 etc.) and
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14, 18-16) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a super reach suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect is executed. , Fig. 18-19, Fig. 18-20, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-26, etc.)
With more
When the second effect state is controlled, the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a lower rate than when the first effect state is controlled (for example, FIG. 18-). 14, Fig. 18-16, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

(2) Other gaming machines related to the feature unit 095AK are
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
After being controlled to the advantageous state, there is a possibility that the first state (for example, the second special figure jackpot X, the post-hit control state of the jackpot A via the small hit, etc.) and the advantageous state rather than the first state are controlled. Can be controlled to the second state (for example, the second special figure big hit Y, the post-hit control state of the big hit B via the small hit, the second special figure big hit Z, the post-hit control state of the big hit C via the small hit, etc.) With state control means (eg, FIGS. 18-2, 18-28, etc.),
A hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about the variable display that has not yet been executed as hold information, and
It is possible to display the effect result of a specific effect result (for example, a success result) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled and a predetermined effect result (for example, a failure result) for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-11, 18-14, 18-19, 18-20, FIG. 18-20, which can execute a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect). 18-22, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.)
The effect state control means (for example, FIG. 18) that can control the first effect state (for example, the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode) and the second effect state (for example, the state controlled in the battle mode). -6, Fig. 18-7, Fig. 18-9, Fig. 18-10, Fig. 18-14, Fig. 18-21, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-25 to Fig. 18-27, etc.)
With
The specific effect executing means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22, etc.).
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the second effect state. When the second state is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, FIG. 18-26 etc.),
When controlled to the second effect state, one of the variable display during execution and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. One of a variable display that is controlled and controlled to the advantageous state and then controlled to the first state and is being executed, and a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. When the variable display different from the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a relief effect) can be executed. Means (eg, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-27, etc.) and
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14, 18-16) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a super reach suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect is executed. , Fig. 18-19, Fig. 18-20, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-26, etc.)
With more
When the second effect state is controlled, the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a lower rate than when the first effect state is controlled (for example, FIG. 18-). 14, Fig. 18-16, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 095AK.
The effect state control means can control the effect state of the first effect state and the second effect state according to the selection by the player (for example, FIGS. 18-9, 18-10, FIG. 18-21, Fig. 18-25, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (3) according to the feature unit 095AK,
The specific effect executing means is
When controlled to the first effect state, the specific effect can be executed in the first effect mode (for example, a symbol fanning mode) (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22). Such),
When controlled to the second effect state, the specific effect can be executed in a second effect mode (for example, a battle mode) different from the first effect mode (for example, FIGS. 18-7 and 18-). 14, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (4) according to the feature unit 095AK,
Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol, etc.) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol, etc.) can be executed (for example, FIGS. 1, 3, 6 to 6 to). (Fig. 10 etc.),
The variable display of the second identification information can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a time saving state) that is executed at a higher rate than the normal state (for example, FIGS. 18-2, 18-4, 18-5, FIG. 18-10, 18-11, 18-20, 18-28, etc.),
The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect when it is controlled to the specific state and a predetermined variable display (for example, time reduction final variation) is executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, Fig. 18-11, Fig. 18-14, Fig. 18-15, Fig. 18-21, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-25 to Fig. 18-27, etc.),
When the predetermined variable display is being executed, a special variable display (for example, pseudo-variable display) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is performed again can be executed a predetermined number of times (for example, FIG. 18-6). , FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-17, 18-19 to 18-22, 18-25 to 18-27, etc.),
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect during the period in which the special variable display is executed once when the predetermined variable display is executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6 and 18). -7, FIGS. 18-14, 18-17, 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (5) according to the feature unit 095AK,
Variable display of identification information (for example, production symbols) can be executed, and
Specific notification execution means (for example, advance notice effect processing in step AKS 108, display result corresponding effect in step AKS 110) capable of executing specific notification (for example, advance notice effect, display result corresponding effect, etc.) for notifying whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state. (Such as the effect control CPU 101 that executes processing) and
A reduced variable display means (for example, a small symbol display area 9K of the effect display device 9) capable of variably displaying the reduced identification information (for example, a small symbol) in a mode reduced from the identification information, and
With more
The specific notification execution means is related to the specific variable display in the specific variable display and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the specific variable display is executed. The specific notification can be executed,
When the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is not controlled to the advantageous state and is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display is not stored in the hold storage means, the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. A predetermined display result (for example, as a display result of the reduced identification information) is executed in the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means after the specific variable display is completed by executing the specific notification for notifying that the specific variable display is not performed. It is possible to derive the final stop symbol of the loss combination, etc.)
The above for notifying that the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display. The predetermined display result is displayed as the display result of the reduced identification information in the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the hold storage means after the specific notification is executed and the specific variable display is completed. It is possible to derive a special display result composed of a part of the reduced identification information that constitutes and the special identification information that is not included in the reduced identification information that constitutes the predetermined display result, and the variable display based on the specific pending information. It is possible to notify that the control to the advantageous state is performed in a mode different from the specific notification.
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, in the case of the first special figure jackpot C) and a second advantageous state (for example, the first special figure jackpot A, first) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Special figure big hit B, 2nd special figure big hit, big hit via small hit X to Z, etc.)
When controlled to the second advantageous state, the display result of the identification information is a specific display composed of only the specific identification information (for example, the red 7 effect symbol and the small symbol, the gold 7 effect symbol and the small symbol, etc.). Derived the result,
The reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result includes predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information.
You may do so.
With such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 096AK)
The feature section 095AK includes the following feature section 096AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 096AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about the variable display that has not yet been executed as hold information, and
It is possible to display the effect result of a specific effect result (for example, a success result) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled and a predetermined effect result (for example, a failure result) for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-11, 18-14, 18-19, 18-20, FIG. 18-20, which can execute a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect). 18-22, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.)
The effect state control means (for example, FIG. 18) that can control the first effect state (for example, the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode) and the second effect state (for example, the state controlled in the battle mode). -6, Fig. 18-7, Fig. 18-9, Fig. 18-10, Fig. 18-14, Fig. 18-21, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-25 to Fig. 18-27, etc.)
With
The specific effect executing means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22, etc.).
The advantageous state in at least two variable displays of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the second effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, etc.).
When controlled to the second effect state, one of the variable display during execution and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. When the variable display controlled and being executed and the variable display stored by the hold storage means are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display different from the one variable display, the effect different from the specific effect. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-, which are special effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18- 27 etc.)
When the control to the first effect state ends, it is possible to execute an effect different from that when the control to the second effect state ends (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14). , Fig. 18-19, Fig. 18-20, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) Other gaming machines related to the feature unit 096AK are
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
After being controlled to the advantageous state, there is a possibility that the first state (for example, the second special figure jackpot X, the post-hit control state of the jackpot A via the small hit, etc.) and the advantageous state rather than the first state are controlled. Can be controlled to the second state (for example, the second special figure big hit Y, the post-hit control state of the big hit B via the small hit, the second special figure big hit Z, the post-hit control state of the big hit C via the small hit, etc.) With state control means (eg, FIGS. 18-2, 18-28, etc.),
A hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about the variable display that has not yet been executed as hold information, and
It is possible to display the effect result of a specific effect result (for example, a success result) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled and a predetermined effect result (for example, a failure result) for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Specific effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-11, 18-14, 18-19, 18-20, FIG. 18-20, which can execute a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect). 18-22, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.)
The effect state control means (for example, FIG. 18) that can control the first effect state (for example, the state controlled in the symbol fanning mode) and the second effect state (for example, the state controlled in the battle mode). -6, Fig. 18-7, Fig. 18-9, Fig. 18-10, Fig. 18-14, Fig. 18-21, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-25 to Fig. 18-27, etc.)
With
The specific effect executing means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22, etc.).
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the second effect state. When the second state is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed (for example, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, FIG. 18-26 etc.),
When controlled to the second effect state, one of the variable display during execution and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. One of a variable display that is controlled and controlled to the advantageous state and then controlled to the first state and is being executed, and a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. When the variable display different from the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a relief effect) can be executed. Further provided with means (eg, FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-26, 18-27, etc.).
When the control to the first effect state ends, it is possible to execute an effect different from that when the control to the second effect state ends (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14). , Fig. 18-19, Fig. 18-20, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 096AK.
The effect state control means can control the effect state of the first effect state and the second effect state according to the selection by the player (for example, FIGS. 18-9, 18-10, FIG. 18-21, Fig. 18-25, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (3) according to the feature unit 096AK,
The specific effect executing means is
When controlled to the first effect state, the specific effect can be executed in the first effect mode (for example, a symbol fanning mode) (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-14, 18-22). Such),
When controlled to the second effect state, the specific effect can be executed in a second effect mode (for example, a battle mode) different from the first effect mode (for example, FIGS. 18-7 and 18-). 14, Fig. 18-26, Fig. 18-27, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (4) according to the feature unit 096AK,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 18-6, 18-7, 18-14, 18-16) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a super reach suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect is executed. , 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, etc.)
Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol, etc.) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol, etc.) can be executed (for example, FIGS. 1, 3, 6 to 6 to). (Fig. 10 etc.),
The variable display of the second identification information can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a time saving state) that is executed at a higher rate than the normal state (for example, FIGS. 18-2, 18-4, 18-5, FIG. 18-10, 18-11, 18-20, 18-28, etc.),
The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect when it is controlled to the specific state and a predetermined variable display (for example, time reduction final variation) is executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6, FIG. 18-7, Fig. 18-11, Fig. 18-14, Fig. 18-15, Fig. 18-21, Fig. 18-22, Fig. 18-25 to Fig. 18-27, etc.),
When the predetermined variable display is being executed, a special variable display (for example, pseudo-variable display) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is performed again can be executed a predetermined number of times (for example, FIG. 18-6). , FIGS. 18-7, 18-14, 18-17, 18-19 to 18-22, 18-25 to 18-27, etc.),
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect during the period in which the special variable display is executed once when the predetermined variable display is executed (for example, FIGS. 18-6 and 18). -7, FIGS. 18-14, 18-17, 18-19, 18-20, 18-22, 18-26, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (5) according to the feature unit 096AK,
Variable display of identification information (for example, production symbols) can be executed, and
Specific notification execution means (for example, advance notice effect processing in step AKS 108, display result corresponding effect in step AKS 110) capable of executing specific notification (for example, advance notice effect, display result corresponding effect, etc.) for notifying whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state. (Such as the effect control CPU 101 that executes processing) and
A reduced variable display means (for example, a small symbol display area 9K of the effect display device 9) capable of variably displaying the reduced identification information (for example, a small symbol) in a mode reduced from the identification information, and
With more
The specific notification execution means is related to the specific variable display in the specific variable display and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the specific variable display is executed. The specific notification can be executed,
When the specific hold information regarding the variable display which is not controlled to the advantageous state and is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display is not stored in the hold storage means, the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state. A predetermined display result (for example, as a display result of the reduced identification information) is executed in the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means after the specific variable display is completed by executing the specific notification for notifying that the specific variable display is not performed. It is possible to derive the final stop symbol of the loss combination, etc.)
The above for notifying that the specific variable display is controlled to the advantageous state when the specific hold information is stored in the hold storage means without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific variable display. The predetermined display result is displayed as the display result of the reduced identification information in the variable display based on the hold information different from the specific hold information stored in the hold storage means after the specific notification is executed and the specific variable display is completed. It is possible to derive a special display result composed of a part of the reduced identification information that constitutes and the special identification information that is not included in the reduced identification information that constitutes the predetermined display result, and the variable display based on the specific pending information. It is possible to notify that the control to the advantageous state is performed in a mode different from the specific notification.
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, in the case of the first special figure jackpot C) and a second advantageous state (for example, the first special figure jackpot A, first) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Special figure big hit B, 2nd special figure big hit, big hit via small hit X to Z, etc.)
When controlled to the second advantageous state, the display result of the identification information is a specific display composed of only the specific identification information (for example, the red 7 effect symbol and the small symbol, the gold 7 effect symbol and the small symbol, etc.). Derived the result,
The reduced identification information different from the special identification information constituting the special display result includes predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information.
You may do so.
With such a configuration, appropriate display control becomes possible.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 8a ... 1st special symbol display 8b ... 2nd special symbol display 9 ... Production display device 31 ... Main board 80 ... Production control board 100 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Production control CPU
560 ... Microcomputer for game control

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means that can store information about variable display that has not yet been executed as hold information,
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect capable of displaying the effect result of the specific effect result notifying that the advantageous state is controlled and the predetermined effect result notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, and the specific effect executing means.
An effect state control means that can control the effect state of the first effect state and the second effect state,
With
The specific effect executing means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect that displays the specific effect result can be executed.
The advantageous state in at least two variable displays of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the second effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect that displays the specific effect result can be executed.
When controlled to the second effect state, one of the variable display during execution and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. When the variable display controlled and being executed and the variable display stored by the hold storage means are not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display different from the one variable display, the effect different from the specific effect. A special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, and a special effect executing means.
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed, and
With more
When the second effect state is controlled, the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a lower rate than when the first effect state is controlled.
A gaming machine characterized by that. It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means capable of controlling the first state and the second state, which is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first state, after being controlled to the advantageous state.
A hold storage means that can store information about variable display that has not yet been executed as hold information,
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect capable of displaying the effect result of the specific effect result notifying that the advantageous state is controlled and the predetermined effect result notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, and the specific effect executing means.
An effect state control means that can control the effect state of the first effect state and the second effect state,
With
The specific effect executing means is
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the first effect state. When controlled to, the specific effect that displays the specific effect result can be executed.
The advantageous state in at least one variable display of the variable display being executed and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the second effect state. When it is controlled to the second state after being controlled to the advantageous state, the specific effect for displaying the specific effect result can be executed.
When controlled to the second effect state, one of the variable display during execution and the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. One of a variable display that is controlled and controlled to the advantageous state and then controlled to the first state and is being executed, and a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored by the hold storage means. When the variable display different from the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect executing means which is different from the specific effect and can execute the special effect suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed, and
With more
When the second effect state is controlled, the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a lower rate than when the first effect state is controlled.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images